2016 Jeep Wrangler Owner`s Manual

2016 Jeep Wrangler Owner`s Manual
2016
OWNER’S MANUAL
Wrangler
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .8
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .9
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take
time to become familiar with your vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a “Starting And Operating” for further information.
four-wheel drive vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION 5
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
ROLLOVER WARNING
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle best, has factory-trained
technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity and the narrower track, if
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- other vehicles may not.
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1
6 INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In a
rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always
buckle up.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION 7
1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side
of the engine block.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears underbody, on the right side of the
Vehicle Identification Number
frame rail near the center of the vehicle, as well as on the
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a
window on your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient
record of your vehicle identification number and optional
equipment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION 9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .21
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Remote Key Unlock On First Push . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate . .
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Sound Horn On Lock . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
. . . . . . .22
. . . . . . .23
. . . . . . .23
. . . . . . .24
. . . . . . .25
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .26 䡵 DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Upper Half Door Window Removal — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Upper Half Door Window Installation — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Front Door Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) . . . . . .34
䡵 Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped . . . . . .30 䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
䡵 To Enter Remote Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
䡵 To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .40
䡵 To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
▫ Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .43 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .98
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
䡵 REAR SWING GATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .63
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Ignition Key Removal
The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has 1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an
the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
automatic transmission).
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys. Ask your
authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (Accessory)
position.
safe place.
3. Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to
the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.
Vehicle Key With RKE Transmitter
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
WARNING!
Ignition Switch Positions
1
2
3
4
— LOCK
— ACC (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, and
remove the Key Fob from the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove key from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when
the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are proOpening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the
engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle Security Light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine.
Either of these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 be programmed to any other vehicle.
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at
least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds.
Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized
Then, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position
dealer or by following the customer key programming
and remove the first key.
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one 3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
that has never been programmed.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Syssound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
authorized dealer.
position and remove the second key.
Customer Key Programming
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch. Turn
If you have two valid Sentry Keys, you can program new
the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within 60
Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following
seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
procedure:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flash- General Information
ing. To indicate that programming is complete, the The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
seconds and then turn off.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
The new Sentry Key is programmed. The Remote Keywith Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
less Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be programmed
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
during this procedure.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key, contact your 2. This device must accept any interference received,
authorized dealer for details.
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys- NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
tem’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from by the party responsible for compliance could void the
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be user’s authority to operate the equipment.
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Rearming The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
swing gate, and ignition for unauthorized operation.
While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior
switches for door locks are disabled. The Vehicle Security
Alarm provides both audible and visible signals when
alarming. The horn will sound, the headlights will turn
on, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes. If the disturbance is still present
(driver’s door, passenger door, other doors, ignition) after
three minutes, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn
signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes.
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
NOTE: The Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm
are quite different. Please take a moment to activate the
Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm to hear the
differences in the horn. In case one should go off in the
future, you will need to know which mode has been
activated in order to deactivate it.
To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock the doors
and swing gate, or when you use the power door lock
switch while the door is open. After all the doors are
locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light (located on
the instrument cluster) will flash rapidly for about 16
seconds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is
arming. During this 16-second arming period, opening
any door or the swing gate will cancel the arming. If the
Vehicle Security Alarm is successfully set, the Vehicle
Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the
Vehicle Security Alarm is armed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
with the key and then locking it. The door will be locked
but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm.
To Disarm The System
To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm, you will need to
push the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter, or NOTE:
turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. If
• Unlocking the doors with the manual door lock plungsomething has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
ers or the driver’s door lock cylinder will not disarm
your absence, the horn will sound three times, and the
the Vehicle Security Alarm.
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you
remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE
transmitter, once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed
(after 16 seconds), when you pull the door handle to exit,
the alarm will sound. If this occurs, push the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm. You may also accidentally disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver’s door
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
Three Button RKE Transmitter
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
swing gate, and activate the Panic Alarm from a maximum distance of 66 ft (20 m) using a Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
all the doors and swing gate. When the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button is pushed, the Illuminated Entry will
initiate, and the turn signal lights will flash twice.
Remote Key Unlock On First Push
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s side, or all doors and swing gate on the first
push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
Four Button RKE Transmitter
• For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote
with metal objects.
Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by performTo Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate
ing the following steps:
Push and release the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button
1. Push and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
once to unlock the driver’s door only, or twice to unlock
RKE transmitter.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Continue to hold the RKE transmitter LOCK button 5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
for at least four seconds, but not longer than 10
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
seconds, then push and hold the RKE transmitter
NOTE: Pushing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while
UNLOCK button.
you are inside of the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the
4. Test this feature while outside of the vehicle by
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vepushing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the RKE
hicle Security Alarm.
transmitter.
To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate
NOTE: Pushing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while
you are inside of the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitSecurity Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security ter to lock all doors. The turn signals will flash, and the
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal.
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Sound Horn On Lock
The “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be reactivated by
repeating this procedure.
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be Using The Panic Alarm
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
proceed as follows:
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec- second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un- will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor- The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
mation.
you turn it off by pushing the PANIC button a second
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the time, or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
following steps:
NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pushing
1. Push the RKE transmitter LOCK button for 4 to 10 the PANIC button a second time, you may have to move
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
seconds.
the system.
2. While the LOCK button is pushed (after four seconds),
push the RKE transmitter PANIC button. Release both
buttons.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Test the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature outside of
the vehicle by pushing the RKE transmitter LOCK
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
button with the ignition switch in the LOCK position
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitand the ignition key removed.
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
NOTE: Pushing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while
you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “ElecAlarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the RKE
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Untransmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforSecurity Alarm.
mation.
The “Flash Lights With Lock” feature can be reactivated
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
by repeating this procedure.
following steps:
Programming Additional Transmitters
1. Push the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button for 4 to 10
Refer to “Sentry Key” in “Things To Know Before Startseconds.
ing” for further information.
2. While the UNLOCK button is pushed, (after four
seconds) push the RKE transmitter LOCK button. If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Release both buttons.
To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
2
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE
transmitter apart. Use extreme care not to damage the
seal or internal components.
Separating RKE Transmitter Halves
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
maintaining security. The system has a range of
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
approximately
300 ft (91 m).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and NOTE:
2. This device must accept any interference received, • The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
may reduce this range.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
How To Use Remote Start
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
All of the following conditions must be met before the • Vehicle Security Alarm not active
engine will remote start:
WARNING!
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• RKE PANIC button not pushed
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
To Enter Remote Start
Push and release the REMOTE START button on
the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds.
The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights
will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
to the ON/RUN position.
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur: To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
• The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500.
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
• Any engine warning lamps come on.
• The hood is opened.
• The hazard switch is pushed.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
• The transmission is moved out of PARK.
• The brake pedal is pushed.
General Information
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
DOORS
CAUTION!
Careless handling and storage of the removable door
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
Upper Half Door Window Removal — If Equipped
Grasp the half door window and pull upward.
Upper Half Door Window
Upper Half Door Window Installation — If
Equipped
1. Grasp the half door window and line up the pins with
the pockets in the lower door.
2. Push down to ensure the half door window is fully
seated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.
Front Door Removal
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and
lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver).
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.
Door Removal Warning Label
NOTE: The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor.
Hinge Pin Screw
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Unplug the wiring harness connector under the instru- 4. Unhook the door strap from the body hook. Be careful
ment panel by pushing the tab at the base of the
not to allow the door to swing fully open as the mirror
connector and pulling down to disconnect.
may damage the paint.
5. With the door open, lift the door to clear the hinge pins
from their hinges and remove the door.
NOTE: Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
them.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the
opposite order.
Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models)
WARNING!
Door Strap/Harness Location
1 — Wiring Harness (follow the harness up and under the instrument panel to the connector)
2 — Body Hook
3 — Door/Harness Strap
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
Door Removal Warning Label
Hinge Pin Screw
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.
3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and 4. Remove the trim access door from the bottom of the
lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver).
B-pillar.
NOTE: The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Trim Access Door
Connector Latched
5. Unplug the wiring harness connector.
NOTE: Squeeze the tab on the base of the connector. This
will unlock the connector tab, allowing the harness to be
disconnected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
7. With the door open, lift the door to clear the hinge pins
from their hinges and remove the door.
NOTE: Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
them.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the
opposite order.
Connector Unplugged
6. Unhook the door strap from the body hook.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
All doors are equipped with an interior rocker-type door
lock lever. To lock a door when leaving your vehicle,
push the rocker lever forward to the LOCK position and
close the door. To UNLOCK the door, push the rocker
lever rearward.
Manual Door Lock (Full Frame Doors)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING!
Manual Door Lock (Half Doors)
NOTE: The ignition key that is used to start the vehicle
is used to lock or unlock the doors, swing gate, glove
compartment, and console storage.
• For personal security reasons and safety in a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
WARNING!
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Push the switch forward to lock the doors, and
rearward to unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
• For personal security reasons and safety in a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer. The auto door lock feature is enabled/
disabled in the Uconnect Settings.
The “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit — If Equipped
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON/
RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in
the LOCK position.
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with 3. Push the power door unlock switch to unlock the
doors.
power door locks if:
1. The “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” feature is 4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
enabled.
2. The vehicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h) and the
transmission shift lever is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
3. The driver door is opened.
NOTE: Use the “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit”
feature in accordance with local laws.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the rocker lever rearward (unlocked position), roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
2
WINDOWS
Power Windows — If Equipped
The power window switches are located on the instrument panel below the radio. Push the switch downward
to open the window and upward to close the window.
Power Window Switches
The top left switch controls the left front window and the
top right switch controls the right front window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Four-Door Models
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger
window, and the lower right switch controls the right
rear passenger window.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Push the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
To partially open the window, push halfway to the first
detent and release it when you want the window to stop.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Window Lockout Switch — Four-Door Models
The window lockout switch (located between the front
window switches) allows you to disable the rear window
switches that are located on the back of the center floor
console. To disable the window controls, push the window lockout button downward. To enable the window
controls, push the window lockout button upward.
2
Window Lockout Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Power Windows — Four-Door Models
Wind Buffeting
The rear passenger window switches are located on the
back of the center floor console. Push the switch downward to open the window and upward to close the
window.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized
by adjusting the window opening.
REAR SWING GATE
The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using the key,
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or by activating
the power door lock switches located on the front doors.
To open the swing gate, push the button on the gate
handle.
Rear Power Window Switches (Four-Door Models)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
CAUTION!
Do not press on rear wiper blade when closing the
rear flip-up window, as damage to the blade will
result.
WARNING!
Gate Handle
Driving with the flip-up window open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and
your passengers could be injured by these fumes.
Keep the flip-up window closed when you are operating the vehicle.
NOTE: Close the rear flip-up window before attempting
to close the swing gate (hard top models only).
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
• Child Restraints
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chilImportant Safety Precautions
dren who do not use child restraints or beltPlease pay close attention to the information in this
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
properly.
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
Seat Belt Systems
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Initial Indication
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
turned to the START or ON/RUN position, an intermittent chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN
position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buck- Change Of Status
led. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccuequipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
pied.
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
belts are buckled again.
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un- when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authovehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
WARNING!
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
(Continued)
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortslack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout
This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever
the rear seatback is not fully latched. This prevents
someone from wearing the rear center lap/shoulder belt
when the rear seatback is not fully latched.
NOTE: If the rear center lap/shoulder belt cannot be
pulled out, check that the rear seatback is fully latched.
WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lockout feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in
the fully upright and locked position when occupied.
If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked
and the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled
out of the retractor, immediately take the vehicle to
your authorized dealer for service. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or death.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
If the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear center Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
lap/shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out, the shoulder belt.
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) system may be activated. To reset this feature you must let all of the seat belt 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to
pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been
returned back into the retractor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
2
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child worn snugly and positioned properly.
if they are wearing a seat belt.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- defines the type of feature for each seating position.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Two-Door Models
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Four-Door Models
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
Air Bag System Components
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag • Seat Belt Buckle Switch
system components:
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Advanced Front Air Bags
• Air Bag Warning Light
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
• Steering Wheel and Column
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
• Instrument Panel
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
• Knee Impact Bolsters
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
• Advanced Front Air Bags
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
the air bag covers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Driver and Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
WARNING!
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
severe initial deceleration.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
outboard side of the seats. The SABs may help to reduce
the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occuseat belts and body structure.
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
Your vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatSupplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Location
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) that are located in the
outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
SABs are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines
whether the deployment of the SAB in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and
type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the SAB on the impact
side of the vehicle during impacts that require SAB
occupant protection. In side impacts, the SABs deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the left SAB
only and a right side impact deploys the right side SAB
only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not SABs should have deployed.
The SABs will not deploy in all side collisions, including
some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions
that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment.
SABs are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system.
SABs deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes.
Occupants, including children, who are up against or very
close to SABs can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or sleep against
the door, side windows, or area where the SABs inflate,
even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from an inflating SAB.
To get the best protection from the SABs, occupants must
wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• SABs need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the SABs during deployment
could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the SABs alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The SABs work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, SABs won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belt even though you have SABs.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious to you, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have dedeploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric- ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a bags will not be in place to protect you.
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
WARNING!
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immeparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air System serviced as well.
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye NOTE:
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
but they will open during air bag deployment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
authorized dealer immediately.
Procedure
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
eight-second interval.
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malremains on while driving.
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
again after initial startup.
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protecThe ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfuncsystem immediately.
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the
on position, and stays on after you start the vehicle, or
if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
(Continued)
(Continued)
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating; To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be proschildren from newborn size to the child almost large
ecuted for ignoring it.
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
the rear seats rather than in the front.
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has • Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1-866-732-8243.
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and
Toddlers
Small Children
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or younger
and who have not reached the height or
weight limits of their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
Latch Positions (Four-Door Models)
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Latch Positions (Two-Door Models)
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?
No
Yes (4-Door Model
Only)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
You can install child restraints with flexible
lower anchors in the center position. The
inner anchorages are 19 inches (484 mm)
apart. Do not install child restraints with
rigid lower anchors in the center position.
Do not install a child restraint in the center
rear of a 2-Door model.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes (2-Door Model
only)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Head restraints cannot be removed in the
4-Door model.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
2
Tether Strap Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
LATCH Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat, near the floor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH: Two Door
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating position.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.
Center Seat LATCH: Four Door
Tether Strap Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments in the center seating position. Only install this type
of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child
restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be installed in any rear seating position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCHcompatible child restraints next to each other, you
must use the seat belt for the center position. You can
then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s
seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions. Please refer to “Installing The LATCHCompatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
ing position.
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the used by other occupants or being used to secure child
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
tions to attach a tether anchor.
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
turer’s instructions.
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) them.
in any direction.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Four-Door Models
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Two-Door Models
•
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be
removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Yes (2-Door Model only)
Yes
No
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Head restraints cannot be removed
in the 4-Door model.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR
retractor.
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
more room for the child seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
“click.”
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models)
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detriAn unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
mental and should be avoided.
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
Vehicle” for the recommended viscosity and quality
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
grades.
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Transporting Pets
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Air Bag Warning Light
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault
is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Defroster
WARNING!
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel
the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lights
Fluid Leaks
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Cancel Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . .111
▫ Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone to a Mobile
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .112
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
䡵 UCONNECT PHONE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .115
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Help Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ Dial by Saying a Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Call by Saying a Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook . . . .121
▫ Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry. . . . . . . . . .123
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect Phonebook
Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ List All Names in the Uconnect Phonebook . . .124
▫ Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Uconnect Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two-Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
▫ Tip n’ Slide Seats — Two-Door Models . . . . . .156
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .146
▫ Removing the Rear Seat — Two-Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Replacing The Rear Seat — Two-Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four-Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .176
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .169
▫ Windshield Washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Front Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .172
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. . . . . . .181
. . . . . . .182
. . . . . . .182
. . . . . . .183
. . . . . . .183
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .185
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .189
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ Removing The Soft Top — Two-Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Installing The Soft Top — Two-Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
䡵 DUAL TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
▫ Removing The Soft Top — Four-Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ Installing The Soft Top — Four-Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Console Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . .192
䡵 FREEDOM TOP THREE-PIECE MODULAR
HARD TOP — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Rear Storage Compartment — If Equipped . . .193
▫ Front Panel(s) Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
䡵 DUAL TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Freedom Top Storage Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Front Panel(s) Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
▫ Front Panel(s) Installation With Rear Hard Top
Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Raising The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ Rear Hard Top Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
䡵 SUNRIDER (TWO-DOOR MODELS) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Rear Hard Top Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Opening The Sunrider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
䡵 DOOR FRAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ Closing The Sunrider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Door Frame Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 䡵 SOFT TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS . . . . . . . .258
▫ Door Frame Installation — Two-Door
Models — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Door Frame Installation — Four-Door
Models — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
䡵 SOFT TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS . . . . . . . .225
▫ Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top . . . . . .228
▫ Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top . . . . . . . .232
▫ Lowering The Soft Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top . . . . . .261
▫ Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top . . . . . . .266
▫ Folding Down The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Putting Up The Soft Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
䡵 SUNRIDER (FOUR-DOOR MODELS) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Opening The Sunrider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Closing The Sunrider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 FOLDING WINDSHIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES — HARD TOP
ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
▫ Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side
Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped . .301
▫ Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side
Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
▫ Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped . . . . . .302
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
3
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
WARNING!
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
Outside Rearview Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror switch is located on the center of the
instrument panel, below the climate controls. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Power Mirror Switch
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.
Vanity Mirrors
Vanity mirrors are located on the sun visors. To use the
mirrors, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror
cover upward.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Vanity Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
UCONNECT PHONE — IF EQUIPPED
• Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect Phone allows
you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone
using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ
“Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your mobile phone’s
audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when
using the Uconnect Phone.
• Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
• Sun., Closed
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone
works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be
• U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week).
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
• Canadian Residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call Uconnect Phone. The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
mobile phones to be linked to the system. Only one
NOTE: The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth “Hands-Free Profile,” Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect website for supported phones. For Uconnect customer support:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
linked (or paired) mobile phone can be used with the access the system. When you push the button you will
system at a time. The system is available in English, hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
Spanish, or French languages.
NOTE: The driver side upper windshield trim contains
the microphone for the Uconnect Phone.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel.
You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
Uconnect Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
button and Voice Com(Uconnect Phone
mand
button) that will enable you to
Voice Command Button
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Operation
Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone
“Operation” section.
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands-Free Uconnect Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone. See the specific command and then guided through the available
Uconnect website for supported phones. Refer to your options.
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
details.
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s
prompt.
audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be
adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or • For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so
“Phone Pairing,” the following compound command
equipped.
can be said: “Setup Phone Pairing.”
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
certain radios.
can also break the commands into parts and say each
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry,” or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry.” Please remember, the
Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal
conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a
few feet/meters away from you.
for directions. All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with
a push of the Phone
button on the faceplate.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Voice Command Tree
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone to a Mobile Phone
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
Help Command
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect webknow your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
the beep. The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at
The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone
any prompt if you ask for help.
pairing instructions:
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push
button to begin.
button and follow the audible prompts • Push the Phone
the Phone
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Phone”
and follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect System. The priority
allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect Phone will use the priority three mobile
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial by Saying a Number
give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
given a unique phone name.
“Dial.”
• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being • The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
phones to your Uconnect Phone. However, at any
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number • The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
appear in the display of certain radios.
of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text
“Call.”
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect
person you want to call.
website for supported phones.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example, • To call a name from downloaded (or Uconnect) Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
you can say “John Doe,” where John Doe is a previName” section.
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or
downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a name
in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect Phonebook,” in the phonebook.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be
as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transmade to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you
ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
start the vehicle.
phone connection.
• A maximum of 1,000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook
to the Uconnect Phone.
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
button to begin.
• Push the Phone
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previous downloaded phonebook is available • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry.”
for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recomphone is accessible.
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
instead of “Bob.”
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phonebook.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries
“Home,” “Work,” “Mobile,” or “Other”). This will
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
book entry, if desired.
“Phonebook Edit.”
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
phonebook entry that you are adding.
entry that you wish to edit.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more • Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
main menu.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
phonebook entry that you are editing.
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
to the main menu.
supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone automatically
downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
NOTE:
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete.”
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
3. After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
deleted or edited.
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another phone
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
number to a name entry that already exists in the phonefrom which you choose. To select one of the entries
book. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile
button
from the list, push the Voice Command
and a home number, but you can add “John Doe’s” work
while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired
number later using the “Phonebook Edit” feature.
entry and say “Delete.”
Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry
4. After you enter the name, the Uconnect Phone will ask
you which designation you wish to delete: home,
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
when the vehicle is not in motion.
wish to delete.
To delete a Uconnect phonebook entry using Voice Com• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
mands:
language is deleted.
button to begin.
1. Push the Phone
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Automatic downloaded phonebook entries can- List All Names in the Uconnect Phonebook
not be deleted or edited.
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect Phonebook Entries
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
To delete, or erase ALL Uconnect phonebook entries
“Phonebook List Names.”
using Voice Command:
• The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the
button to begin.
1. Push the Phone
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All.”
• To call one of the names in the list, push the Voice
button during the playing of the deCommand
• The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you
sired name, and say “Call.”
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
3. After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
deleted.
operations at this point.
• The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• Only the phonebook in the current language is deleted.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be • The selected number will be dialed.
deleted or edited.
NOTE:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button to place the
mobile phone. Push the Phone
current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys- only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
button to accept the call. To Progress
call. Push the Phone
button
reject the call, push and hold the Phone
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
until you hear a single beep, indicating that the
push the Voice Command
button and say “Dial” or
incoming call was rejected.
“Call” followed by the phone number or phonebook
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold
while the second call is in progress. To go back to the
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls” in this Conference Call
section. To combine two calls, refer to “Conference When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
Call” in this section.
hold):
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
button until you hear a
1. Push and hold the Phone
double beep, indicating that the two calls have been
To put a call on hold, push the Phone
button until
you hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on
joined into one conference call.
hold. To bring the call back from hold, push and hold the
Three-Way Calling
button until you hear a single beep.
Phone
To initiate three-way calling, push the Voice Command
Toggling Between Calls
button while a call is in progress, and make a
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), second phone call, as described under “Making a
push the Phone
button until you hear a single beep, Second Call While Current Call is in Progress.” After
indicating that the active and hold status of the two the second call has established, push and hold the
button until you hear a double beep, indicalls have switched. Only one call can be placed on Phone
cating
that
the two calls have been joined into one
hold at a time.
conference call.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
• The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress:
button.
1. Momentarily push the Phone
• Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If
the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a
call on hold may not become active automatically.
This is cell phone-dependent.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect Phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail2. To bring the call back from hold, push and hold the Phone able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
button until you hear a single beep.
1. After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can
Redial
To redial the last number called from your mobile phone
using Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone
continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
on the Uconnect Phone for a certain duration, after voice commands will be in that language.
which the call is automatically transferred from the
NOTE: After every Uconnect Phone language change
Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone.
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone3. An active call is automatically transferred to the book is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and usable across all languages.
mobile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF.
Uconnect Phone Features
Emergency Assistance
Language Selection
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is
the name of the language you wish to switch to
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
English, Espanol, or Francais.
follows:
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the
button to begin.
• Push the Phone
language selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the
paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emergency,
your mobile phone must be:
• Turned on.
• Paired to the Uconnect System.
• Have network coverage.
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may If you need roadside assistance:
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
button to begin.
• Push the Phone
area.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Towing Assistance.”
button
some systems. To do this, push the Phone
and say “Setup,” followed by “Emergency.”
• The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the
mobile phone directly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: You should program the desired Towing Assistance phone number using the Voice Command system.
button and say “Setup,”
To do this, push the Phone
followed by “Towing Assistance.” When prompted
say 1-800-521-2779 for U.S./Canada, say 55-14-3454
for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
City in Mexico.
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services rePaging
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone.
Systems.” Paging works properly except for pagers of
When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
work properly with the Uconnect Phone.
on your mobile phone keypad, you can push the Voice
Voice Mail Calling
button and say the sequence you wish
Command
to
enter,
followed
by the word “Send.” For example,
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
if
required
to
enter
your PIN followed with a pound,
with Automated Systems.”
but(3 7 4 6 #), you can push the Voice Command
ton and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send.” Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by “Send,” is also to be
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
used for navigating through an automated customer • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
service center menu structure, and to leave a number
use of this feature.
on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect Phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
button and
call and then push the Voice Command
say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number and say the name of the phonebook
entry you wish to send. The Uconnect Phone will then
send the corresponding phone number associated
with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
Barge In – Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
button and say,
could push the Voice Command
“Pair a Phone” to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect Phone
network configurations. This is normal.
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn confirmation prompts on or off using Voice Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
Command:
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone (while dialing
button to begin.
1. Push the Phone
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep,
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
say:
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile
• “Setup Confirmations Prompts On”
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicles
• “Setup Confirmations Prompts Off”
audio system. The Uconnect Phone will work the same as
if you dial the number using Voice Command.
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect Phone. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, push the Voice Command
When you mute the Uconnect Phone, you will still be
button and say “Transfer Call.”
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To Connect or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect
mute the Uconnect Phone:
Phone and Mobile Phone
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
• Push the Voice Command
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute.”
To un-mute the Uconnect Phone:
• Push the Voice Command
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off.”
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth
connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• You can also push the Voice Command
button at
any time while the list is being played, and then
• The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all
choose the phone that you wish to select.
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone • The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the Uconnect
butbeing announced, push the Voice Command
ton and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
Phone will return to using the highest priority phone
present in or near (approximately within 30 ft (9 m))
two sections for an alternate way to “Select” or
“Delete” a paired phone.
the vehicle.
• When prompted, say “List Phones.”
Select Another Mobile Phone
Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones
This feature allows you to select and start using another • Push the Phone
button to begin.
phone paired with the Uconnect Phone.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button to begin.
• Push the Phone
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
prompts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
• You can also push the Voice Command
button at • From outside the Uconnect Phone mode (e.g., from
radio mode), push and hold the Voice Command
any time while the list is being played, and then
button for five seconds until the session begins,
choose the phone you wish to delete.
or,
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
• Push the Voice Command
button and say the
Phone
“Voice Training,” “System Training,” or “Start Voice
Uconnect Phone Tutorial
Training” command.
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, push the
You can either push the Uconnect Phone button to restore
Phone
button and say “Uconnect Tutorial.”
the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when
Voice Training
prompted by the Uconnect Phone. For best results, the
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- Voice Training session should be completed when the
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this closed, and the blower fan switched off.
training mode, follow one of the two following proce- This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
dures:
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reset
To Reset all settings using Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
button.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
during a Voice Command period.
“Setup,” then “Reset.”
Performance is maximized under:
• This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries, and other settings in all language modes. The • Low-to-medium blower setting
System will prompt you before resetting to factory • Low-to-medium vehicle speed
settings.
• Low road noise
Voice Command
• Smooth road surface
For best performance:
• Fully closed windows
• Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ inch
(1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) • Dry weather condition
and the mirror.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
NOTE:
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking • Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
in North American English, French, and Spanish acnumber combinations may not be supported.
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system such Far End Audio Performance
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of Audio quality is maximized under:
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
not in motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names • Low road noise
in the Uconnect Phonebook.
• Smooth road surface
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Local) • Fully closed windows
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries
• Dry weather conditions
are not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must • Operation from the driver’s seat
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness Read Messages:
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
not the Uconnect Phone
connected to Uconnect Phone, an announcement will be
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced made to notify you that you have a new text message. If
you wish to hear the new message:
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
• Push the Phone
Recent Calls
button.
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
load,” Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
and Missed Calls.
• Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for
Voice Text Reply
you.
Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your
phone.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect Phone.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Send Messages:
List of Preset Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect Phone. To send a 1.
new message:
2.
button.
• Push the Phone
3.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
4.
“SMS Send” or “Send Messages.”
5.
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say
6.
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
Yes
No
Where are you?
I need more direction
LOL
Why
button 7. I love you
To send a message, push the Voice Command
while the system is listing the message and say
8. Call me
“Send.”
9. Call me later
Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to. 10. Thanks
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
11. See you in 15 minutes
• Push the Phone
12. I am on my way
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, Incoming Message Announcement,” you will
then be given a choice to change it.
13. I’ll be late
14. Are you there yet?
button.
Bluetooth Communication Link
15. Where are we meeting?
18. When can we meet?
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can
generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/
on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth ON mode.
19. Send number to call
Power-Up
20. Start without me
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming messages.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
Alternate (s)
Primary
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Alternate (s)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Primary
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
Alternate (s)
pairing
phone book
Primary
redial
return to main menu
select phone
send
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Alternate (s)
return or main menu
select
phone settings or phone
set up
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System Operation
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
The Uconnect Voice Command system allows
following conditions:
you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player,
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
USB mass storage class device, iPod family of
the party responsible for compliance could void the
devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device,
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
satellite radio, and a memo recorder.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System
• This device must accept any interference received, as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
including interference that may cause undesired op- Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
eration.
voice level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
Pushing the Voice Command
button while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel,”
“Help” or “Main Menu.”
These commands are universal and can be used from any
button, you will menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
When you push the Voice Command
hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a com- the active application.
mand.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few a normal speaking volume.
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
The system will best recognize your speech if the winoptions.
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning blower
If you would like to interrupt the system while it lists is set to low.
button, listen for
options, push the Voice Command
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
the beep, and say your command.
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To hear the first available Menu, push the Voice Com- 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Combutton and say “Help” or “Main Menu.”
mand
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
Commands
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
The Voice Command system understands two types of
system.
commands, Universal commands and Local commands.
Main Menu
Universal commands are available at all times. Local
butcommands are available if the supported radio mode is Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
ton. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
active.
menu.
Changing The Volume
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
button.
• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
• “Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth Stream- Radio FM
ing mode)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
Radio AM
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” In • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Satellite Radio
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio.” In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
USB Mode
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc Mode
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
Name, Track Name, etc.)
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you
Bluetooth Streaming (BT) Mode
may say the following commands:
To switch to Bluetooth Streaming (BT) mode, say
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
“Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Play” (to play the current track)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Pause” (to pause the current track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Memo Mode
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
– “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the Setup
butrecording, you may push the Voice Command
ton to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of To switch to system setup, you may say one of the
following:
the following commands:
• “Change to setup”
– “Save” (to save the memo)
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
• “Switch to system setup”
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Main menu setup”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — • “Switch to setup”
During the playback you may push the Voice Com- In this mode, you may say the following commands:
button to stop playing memos. You promand
• “Language English”
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “Language French”
• “Language Spanish”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• “Tutorial”
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.
• “Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to push the Voice
button first and wait for the beep before
Command
SEATS
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Voice Training
vehicle.
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect
WARNING!
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
button, say “System
1. Push the Voice Command
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
“Voice Training.” This will train your own voice to
or killed.
the system and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
Front Seat Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a
bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Adjusting Bar Location
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
the ratcheting handle, located on the outboard side of the Front Seatback Recline
seat. Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat, push Lean forward before lifting the handle, then lean back to
downward on the handle to lower the seat.
the desired position and release the handle. Lift the
handle to return the seatback to an upright position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two-Door
Models
Pull upward on the recline lever (toward the rear of the
vehicle) and slide the entire seat forward.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Easy Entry Lever
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The front passenger seats have a track memory, which
returns the seat to just past the halfway point of the
track regardless of its original position.
• The recliner and easy entry levers should not be used
during the automatic returning of the seat to its sitting
position.
Tip n’ Slide Seats — Two-Door Models
Easy Entry Seat
This feature allows the front seats to be rotated toward
the instrument panel to allow easier entry into the rear
seats.
To return the seat to a sitting position, rotate the seatback
Driver’s Seat
upright until it locks and push the seat rearward until the
Pull upward on the recline lever and bring the seatback
track locks.
to its full forward position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
3
Recline Lever
Tip n’ Slide
Rotate the entire seat assembly toward the instrument Passenger Seat
panel.
In addition to Easy Entry, the front passenger seat is also
equipped with Tip n’ Slide. This feature allows for easier
entry for rear passengers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pull upward on the recline lever and slide the entire seat With the seat forward, pull the entire seat assembly
forward (Easy Entry).
toward the instrument panel.
Easy Entry Lever
Tip n’ Slide
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each seat are located on a switch bank near
the bottom center of the instrument panel.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 30
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one,
indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF
automatically after approximately 30 minutes.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber NOTE: When a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in within two to five minutes.
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
WARNING!
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating.
Push the switch a second time to select LOlevel heating. Push the switch a third time to
shut the heating elements OFF.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly installed and adjusted prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should
never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustHead restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury ment button located on the base of the head restraint, and
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear push downward on the head restraint.
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go
then push the adjustment button and the release button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint
Head Restraints
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint
posts into the holes and push downward. Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
Rear Head Restraints — 2 Door Model
The rear seat head restraints are not adjustable. They can
be removed to make it easier to take out the rear seat. To
remove the head restraint, push the button on each of the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
two head restraint guides and pull upward on the head
restraint. Replace the head restraint before driving the
vehicle with passengers in the rear seat. To replace the
head restraint, insert the head restraint rods into the
guides and push downward on the head restraint until
locked. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things to
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for information on
child seat tether routing.
WARNING!
• Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat head
restraints installed while passengers are occupying
the rear seat. In a collision, people riding in this
area without the head restraints installed are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
Rear Head Restraints — 4 Door Model
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable head restraints. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things to
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for information on
child seat tether routing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Removing the Rear Seat — Two-Door Models
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seats.
3
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.
1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the seatback
forward.
Rear Seat Release
2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push down on the release bar on each side, and pull
the seat out and away from the lower bracket.
4. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
Folding Rear Seat
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in the forward
tumble position. The seat must be latched to all floor
attachments when the vehicle is in motion.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Release Bar Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
WARNING!
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure that the seats are
fully latched.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area with the
rear seat folded down or removed from the vehicle.
• The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers who should sit in
seats and use seat belts.
Replacing The Rear Seat — Two-Door Models
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four-Door
Models
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat to allow for extended cargo space.
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seat to its mid-track position.
Reverse the steps for removing the seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Release Levers
Slowly fold down the seatback.
To Fold Down The Rear Seat
Locate the release lever (upper outboard side of seat), and
lift it upward until the seatback releases.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
To Raise The Rear Seat
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Raise the seatback and lock it into place. If interference Release both the hood latches.
from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
NOTE: If the rear seatback is not fully latched, the center
shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for use. If
you cannot extend the center shoulder belt, make sure
your seatback is fully latched.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Hood Latch
Raise the hood and locate the safety latch, located in the
middle of the hood opening. Push the safety latch to the left
side of the vehicle, to open the hood. You may have to push
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
down slightly on the hood before pushing the safety latch. passing light, fog lights, instrument panel light dimming
and turn signals. The multifunction lever is located on
Insert the support rod into the slot on the hood.
the left side of the steering column.
To close the hood, remove the support rod from the hood
panel and place it in the retaining clip. Lower the hood
slowly. Secure both of the hood latches.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
parking lights, headlights, headlight beam selection,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Headlights And Parking Lights
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
headlight operation.
turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO
position (third detent). When the system is on, the
Headlight Time Delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position. To turn the
Automatic System off, turn the end of the multifunction
lever out of the AUTO position.
Headlight Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Headlight Switch
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic mode.
Turn Signal Operation
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
NOTE:
High/Low Beam Switch
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you, to
switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
• A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
than 1 mile (2 km).
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond Front Fog Lights
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
The front fog light switch is located on the multifunction lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn
Lights-On Reminder
on the parking or low beam headlights and pull out the
If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the
end of the lever.
ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the
driver when the driver’s door is opened.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the parking
lights or the headlights on low beam. Selecting high
beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme
bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
door is opened.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on.
Dimmer Control
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
The headlights come on at a low intensity level when
the parking lights or headlights are on.
shifted into any position other than PARK (auto transRotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last mission) or when the vehicle begins to move (manual
detent to turn on the interior lighting.
transmission).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
NOTE: The Daytime Running Light on the same side of in the multifunction lever. These lights are also controlled
the vehicle as the active turn signal will turn off auto- automatically by the Illuminated Entry System.
matically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on
again when the turn signal is not operating.
3
Interior Lights
The overhead light will turn on when a door is opened. It
may also be turned on by rotating the control for the
dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward.
The overhead light will automatically turn off in approximately 10 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer
control is left in the dome light position. Turn the ignition
switch ON to restore the overhead light operation.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Courtesy/Reading Light Switches
Two courtesy/reading lights are located in the bottom of A courtesy light is also found in the rear of the center
the rearview mirror. You can turn these lights on and off console. You can turn this light on and off from the dimmer
from the switches in the mirror or from the dimmer control control in the multifunction lever. This light is also controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry System.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Lamp
The courtesy and dome lights will turn on when the front
doors are opened, by rotating the control for the dimmer
switch on the multifunction lever fully upward, or if
equipped, when the UNLOCK button is pushed on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
The sports bar reading lights (available on four-door
models) can be turned on by pushing the switches,
located on either side of the lens. Push a switch a second
time to turn the light off.
Sports Bar Reading Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
The rear cargo light may be turned on by pushing the When a door is open and the interior lights are on,
lens. Push the lens a second time to turn the light off.
rotating the dimmer control to the extreme bottom position will cause all the interior lights to turn off. This is
also known as the “Party” mode because it allows the
doors to stay open for extended periods of time without
discharging the vehicle’s battery.
Rear Cargo Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located at the end of the
lever. For information on using the rear window wiper/
washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third
detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
3
Front Wiper Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause beFront Wiper Control
tween cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the
NOTE:
The
wiper
delay times depend on vehicle speed.
first detent position for one of five intermittent settings.
If
the
vehicle
is
moving
less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
The delay cycle can be set anywhere between 1 to 18
delay
times
will
be
doubled.
seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Windshield Washers
Mist Feature
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
delay range, the wiper will start and continue to operate for
two or three wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to
clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As
long as the lever is held down, the wipers will continue
to operate.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
will operate for two or three wipe cycles and then turn off. windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column.
With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the
steering column up or down, as desired. Pull upwards on
the lever to lock the column firmly in place.
Mist Control
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the
steering column, below the turn signal lever.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Tilt Steering Column Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
3
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the 1 — ON/OFF
2 — RES +
right side of the steering wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
3 — SET 4 — CANCEL
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “UnderA soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control withspeed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition U.S. Speed (mph)
To Deactivate
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
the new set speed will be established.
To Vary The Speed Setting
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Increase Speed
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de- • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
the new set speed will be established.
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
To Accelerate For Passing
U.S. Speed (mph)
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power outlets
moderate hills is normal.
that can provide power for accessories designed for use
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so with the standard power outlet adapters.
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed The front power outlet is located in the center of the
Control.
instrument panel below the climate controls, and is
powered from the ignition switch. Power is available
when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A second power outlet is located inside the center console
and is powered directly from the vehicle battery.
CAUTION!
Front Power Outlet
When the optional cigar lighter heating element is used
in the power outlet, it heats when pushed in and pops out
automatically when ready for use. To preserve the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating
position.
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer, there is a
third power outlet located in the right rear cargo area.
3
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
Rear Power Outlet — If Equipped
1 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
3 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear with Sub Woofer
(Opt.)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
• Manyaccessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., mobile phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high-power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.
3
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
front of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will
exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually push the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
The power inverter switch is located
on the instrument panel below the
climate controls. To turn on the power
outlet, push the switch once. The indicator light will illuminate. Push the
switch a second time to turn the power
inverter outlet off.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
NOTE: When the power inverter switch is pushed, there
will be a delay of approximately one second before the
inverter indicator light turns ON.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
CUPHOLDERS
Rear Cupholders
Front Cupholders
The rear cupholders are located on the back of the center
console.
The front cupholders are located in the center console.
3
Rear Cupholders
Front Cupholders
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The lockable glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the lower instrument panel. Pull outward
on the handle/latch to open the glove compartment.
Console Storage Compartment
To lock or unlock the storage compartment, insert the
ignition key and turn. To open the storage compartment,
push the latch and lift the cover.
Center Console
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
There is an extra storage area underneath the console lid. Rear Storage Compartment — If Equipped
The console lid has an integrated paper clip feature that The rear cargo area storage compartment cover is held by
can hold small items.
a spring-loaded latch. In order to remove the rear storage
compartment cover, use the following procedure:
NOTE: The rear storage compartment latch should not
be used as cargo tie-down.
1. Flip up the pull loop so it is perpendicular (straight
up) to the top surface of the tray.
2. Pull up on the loop and twist it 90 degrees, so it is
parallel to the slotted hole in the tray.
Center Console Lid Storage
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Open the rear compartment cover.
from the sport bar. The soft top was installed at the
factory for shipping purposes only. The soft top and the
hard top are to be used independently. Removal is
mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the
soft top. Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage
resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the
same time for extended periods of time.
Removing The Soft Top — Two-Door Models
1. Locate and remove the two boxes that contain the
following items:
• Right and left door frames
• Four door frame attachment knobs
Rear Storage Cover
• Right and left quarter windows
DUAL TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS — IF
• Rear window
EQUIPPED
• Two rear window roll up straps
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, you must
• Two Sunrider secure straps (if equipped)
remove one of the tops from the vehicle. If the soft top
• Two rear swing gate brackets
is removed, the pivot brackets must also be removed
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Three- 4. Disconnect the knuckles from the left and right metal
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Repivot brackets. Remove the soft top from the vehicle
moval” in this section.
and store in a clean, dry location.
3. Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket NOTE: To aid in disconnecting the knuckles, you may
screws (two per side) using a #T30 Torx head driver. carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Right and left quarter windows
5. Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to expose the
pivot brackets. Remove the brackets using a #T30 Torx
• Rear window
head driver. Recover and re-zip the sports bar cover.
2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top ThreeStore the pivot brackets and screws in a safe place.
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Re6. Reinstall the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Threemoval” in this section.
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Instal3. Install the door frames. Refer to “Door Frame” in this
lation” in this section.
section.
Installing The Soft Top — Two-Door Models
4. If the soft top has been removed, follow these steps to
NOTE: The following procedures are for first time set up
reinstall the soft top. If the soft top is on the vehicle,
only. For future soft top procedures, refer to “Soft Top” in
proceed to step #5.
this section.
a. If the pivot brackets have been removed, unzip the
1. Locate and remove the following items prior to hard
sport bar covers and attach the pivot brackets to the
top removal:
sports bar with the four screws that were removed
• Right and left door frames
using a #T30 Torx head driver. Re-cover and re-zip
the sport bar covers.
• Door frame attachment knobs (four for two-door
models, six for four-door models)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
b. Lay the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with the
bows pointing forward and the curved portion of
the bows facing upward.
c. Reattach the knuckles onto the metal pivot brackets.
NOTE: To aid in reattaching the knuckles, you may
carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet.
d. Screw the pivot screws back into place using a #T30
Torx head driver. Secure them until they are snug,
being careful not to cross-thread the screws or
overtighten.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is
not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top.
6. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This cover
should be discarded. It was intended as a protective
cover for shipping only.
NOTE: A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual
top wrap.
7. Put up the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top — Putting Up
The Soft Top” in this section.
DUAL TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS — IF
EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, you must
remove one of the tops from the vehicle. If the soft top
is removed, the pivot brackets must also be removed
5. Remove the swing gate bar (black metal bar for from the sport bar. The soft top was installed at the
factory for shipping purposes only. The soft top and the
bottom of rear window) and set aside.
hard top are to be used independently. Removal is
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the
screws if they are overtightened.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the 3. Ensure the tether strap is secure to the pivot bracket.
Unbutton the side bow tether strap (both sides).
soft top. Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage
resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the
same time for extended periods of time.
3
Removing The Soft Top — Four-Door Models
1. Locate and remove the two boxes that contain the
following items:
• Right and left door frames
• Six door frame attachment knobs
• Right and left quarter windows
• Rear window
• Two rear window roll up straps
• Two Sunrider secure straps (if equipped)
4. Using the plastic reinforcement as a handle, slide the
tether strap up the side bow (both sides).
• Two rear swing gate brackets
2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top ThreePiece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Removal” in this section.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. The tether strap must be hooked onto the pivot
bracket prior to removal of soft top from vehicle (both
sides).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
6. Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket bolts 8. Remove the soft top from the vehicle and store in a
(two per side) from the sport bar using a 10.0 mm
clean, dry location (another person may be needed to
wrench or socket driver.
help with this operation).
7. Lift the soft top in a upward motion to release the NOTE: If you are doing this alone, use one arm to hold
pivot bracket from the sport bar bracket.
the bundle up, the other to remove the brackets.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
9. Reinstall the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Three- 2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top ThreePiece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel RePiece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Instalmoval” in this section.
lation” in this section.
Installing The Soft Top — Four-Door Models
3. Install the door frames. Refer to “Door Frame” in this
section.
NOTE: The following procedures are for first time set up
only. For future soft top procedures, refer to “Soft Top” in 4. Install the soft top with the pivot brackets above the
this section.
sport bar brackets, lower the soft top into the sport bar
bracket slots in a downward motion to lock tab on soft
1. Locate and remove the following items prior to hard
top. You will need to lift the top to get the brackets to
top removal:
line up. (Another person may be needed to help with
• Right and left door frames
this operation.)
• Six door frame attachment knobs
• Right and left quarter windows
• Rear window
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
NOTE: If you are doing this alone, use one arm to hold
the soft top up, the other to align the brackets.
3
6. Install the pivot bracket bolts back into place using a
10.0 mm wrench or socket driver. Secure them until
they are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the
screws or overtighten.
5. Lower the pivot bracket onto the sport bar bracket
mounting tab in a downward motion to lock into tab.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the
screws if they are overtightened.
8. Using the plastic reinforcement as a handle remove the
tether strap from the bracket hook by sliding strap up
off hook and slide down the side bow (both sides).
7. Remove the tether strap from the pivot bracket.
9. Button the side bow tether strap (both sides).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
NOTE: Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is
not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top.
11. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This cover
should be discarded. It was intended as a protective
cover for shipping only.
NOTE: A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual
top wrap.
12. Put up the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top — Putting Up
The Soft Top” in this section.
10. Remove the swing gate bar (black metal bar for
bottom of rear window) and set aside.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
FREEDOM TOP THREE-PIECE MODULAR HARD
TOP — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
• The hard top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or luggage,
etc. Also, it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle, and thus cannot properly carry
any additional loads other than environmental
(rain, snow, etc.).
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame and
body side, or fully removed.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to panel removal. Removing the top, opening
a door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior.
• The hard top assembly must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicles interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the removable
roof panels may damage the seals, causing water to
leak into the vehicles interior.
• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicles interior.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Front Panel(s) Removal
NOTE: Left panel must be removed before removing
right panel.
1. Fold down the sun visor, and move it to the side.
2. Turn the rear fasteners (knobs) (located on the overhead speaker bar assembly) counterclockwise until
they can be removed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Turn the center L-shaped locks (two) from the center 4. Turn the rear L-shaped lock (located above the shoulof the roof panel.
der belt anchorage).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
5. Unlatch the header panel latch located at the top of the Freedom Top Storage Bag
windshield.
Vehicles equipped with a Freedom Top Modular Hard
Top, come with a Freedom Top storage bag that allows
you to store your Freedom Top panels. The storage bag
contains two compartments and fits behind the rear seat.
Lay the Freedom bag down so the loops and hooks are
facing downward. Unzip the bag and fold back the outer
flap. Release the Velcro on the black panel divider and
fold it back.
NOTE: Ensure the front Freedom Top panel latch is
closed prior to inserting the panel into the Freedom bag.
6. Remove the left-hand panel.
To remove the right panel, follow the steps above
except for Step 3.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Insert the right side Freedom panel into the bag with the Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the divider is
latches facing downward.
laying flat). Secure the Velcro, located at the center of the
divider.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
Insert the left-side Freedom panel into the bag with the Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom bag closed.
latches facing upward.
NOTE: Ensure the front Freedom panel latch is closed
prior to inserting the panel into the bag.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Install the seat attachment strap (at the top of the bag) Lift the Freedom bag into the vehicle with the hooks and
through the loops.
straps facing the back of the rear seat. Attach the clips at
the bottom of the bag to the child restraint anchorages,
located at the base of the rear seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Wrap the upper strap around the rear head restraints and Front Panel(s) Installation
loop the strap through the buckle. Pull on the strap to
NOTE: Set the panels on the windshield frame so that
tighten the Freedom bag securely against the rear seat.
there is no overhang. Also, make sure that the panels are
sitting flush with the body.
1. Install the right panel first, then the left panel.
2. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The front panel(s) must be positioned properly
to ensure sealing. Set the panels on the windshield frame
so that there is no overhang. Also, make sure that the
1. Turn the left and right panels over and move the
panels are sitting flush with the body.
spacer block (located on the rear of the panel) upward
90 degrees.
2. Install the right panel first, then the left panel.
Front Panel(s) Installation With Rear Hard Top
Removed
3. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.
Rear Hard Top Removal
1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Front Panel(s)
Removal” in this section.
2. Open both doors.
3. Remove the two Torx head screws that secure the hard
top at the B-pillar (near the top of the door) using a #40
Torx head driver (Four–Door Only).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
4. Remove the six Torx head screws that secure the hard 6. Locate the wire harness on the left rear inside corner of
top to the vehicle (along the interior bodyside) using a
the vehicle.
#40 Torx head driver.
5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of
the rear window glass. Lift the rear window glass.
3
Wire Harness Connector
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
7. Release the red locking tab by pulling outward to the 8. To remove the wiring harness push the tab and pull
right.
downward to disconnect.
Red Locking Tab
Push Tab To Disconnect
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
9. To remove the washer hose, pinch the grips on hose NOTE: The removal of the Freedom Top requires four
connector and pull downward.
adults located on each corner. Failure to follow this
caution could damage the Freedom Top.
Rear Hard Top Installation
NOTE: If the door frames are installed from soft top
usage, they must be removed prior to installation of the
hard top.
1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if
necessary.
2. Install the hard top using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.
Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with the body
at the sides and check to ensure that there is a uniform
gap between the lift glass and hard top.
Pinch Grip On Hose
10. Close the swing gate.
11. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Place the hard
top on a soft surface to prevent damage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to the
body should be torqued to 88 in lb +/- 22 in lb (10
N·m +/- 2.5 N·m).
• It is not necessary to pinch connection when reinstalling washer hose. Push on until click is heard.
DOOR FRAME
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Careless handling and storage of the removable
door frame(s) may damage the seals, causing water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• The door frame(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
• Opening a door or lowering a window while the
top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s
interior.
(Continued)
• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
door frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.
• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for
use during off-road operation only.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
Door Frame Removal
WARNING!
1. Unscrew and remove the door frame attachment
knobs (two per door).
Use both hands to remove the door frames. The door
frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands
are not used.
2. Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the
front of the door frame.
3. Pull the frame toward you with your rearward hand to
remove the frame from the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Screw the knobs back into the door frame and fold for
storage. Store in a secure location.
WARNING!
• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
door frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for
use during off-road operation only.
Door Frame Installation — Two-Door Models — If
Equipped
1. Unfold door frame and unscrew thumbscrews.
2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body
side, behind the door opening.
3. After the door frame pin has been set into the body
side hole, carefully set the front of the door frame into
the rubber seal at the top of the windshield.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Starting with the front of the door frame, clip it over 5. Starting with the front knob, screw in and tighten both
the metal side bar and then clip the rear, making sure
knobs. Repeat on the other side.
that the material for the side bar covers is not pinched
by the door frame.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
3. Position the top of the door frame against the metal
sport bar and push onto the side bar making sure not
to pinch the material of the sports bar covers and to
1. Install the rear door frame first.
ensure it is properly positioned on the seal above the
2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body
front of the rear door.
side, just behind the rear door opening.
Door Frame Installation — Four-Door Models — If
Equipped
4. Loosely install the rear knob (long knob) to hold the
door rail in position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Carefully set the front of the front door frame in the 7. Position the rear of the front door frame to lay on top
rubber seal at the top of the windshield.
of the front of the rear door frame. Ensure the seals are
installed correctly to avoid water leaks.
6. Clip the front of the door rail over the side bar making
sure that the material for the side bar cover is not 8. Loosely install both knobs beginning with the front
pinched by the door frame.
knob (long knob). Then, install the middle knob (short
knob) through the front and rear door frames and
screw into the top of the B-pillar.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
9. Tighten the front knob, then the rear most knob, and SOFT TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS
then the middle knob. Repeat this procedure for the Please visit the Owners Manual on your DVD for
other side.
instructional videos.
CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting,
or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was
not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and,
thus, cannot properly carry any additional loads other
than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top
has been folded down for a period of time, the top will
appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it
difficult to put up. This is caused by a natural contraction
of the vinyl coating on the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top
fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and
the top can then be installed. If the temperature is 41°F
(5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top down or
roll the rear or side curtains.
CAUTION!
• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax build up may
result.
• Do not lower the top when the temperature is
below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or
fully lowered.
• Do not lower the top with the windows installed.
Window and top damage may occur.
• Refer to “Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It contains important information on cleaning
and caring for your vehicle’s fabric top.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or
force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing
the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top
framework when opening or closing. Damage to
the top may result.
• The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed
only for protection against the elements. Do not
rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident. Remember, always wear seat belts.
• Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch
points when installing and removing the soft tops.
The zippers and side bows may cause serious
injury if fingers or hands get caught in between.
WARNING!
• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window
curtain up unless the side curtains are also removed. Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the
vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the soft top may
damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
• The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to
leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Refer to “Lowering The Soft Top” in this section for
further information.
1. Remove the side windows.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
2. Remove the back window.
3. Release header latches from the windshield frame.
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Release the sail panel retainers from the body side 5. Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid rearward over
channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
the Sunrider link to lock in the link (Sunrider Models
only).
NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
6. As you begin to lower the top, fold the sail panels so
that they rest on top of the soft top.
7. Release the Sunrider latch (both sides).
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
8. Open the swing gate and lower the top.
Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top
NOTE: Ensure fabric does not overhang the sides of the Refer to “Raising The Soft Top” in this section for further
information.
vehicle.
1. Open the swing gate and raise the top, engaging the
Sunrider latches (another person may be needed to
help with this operation).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
3
2. Engage header latches.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Install rear corner panels.
4. Install the back window.
5. Install the side windows.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
6. To install the side windows, affix the window tempo- 7. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
rarily by attaching to the Velcro in the rear corner. Start
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
the zipper but close only about 1 in (2.5 cm).
properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do
so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the
window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
8. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the
window into the bottom side channel, beginning at the
front and working to the rear of the vehicle. Finish by
closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro
along the top and rear of the window. Repeat this step
for the opposite side.
1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
Lowering The Soft Top
3
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Header Bow
2–Bow
3–Bow
Sail Panel
Body Side Retainer
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Quarter Window
Check Strap
Front Retainer — Quarter Window
Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Zipper Start
Zipper Finish
Swing Gate Bar
Swing Gate Brackets
Sail Panels
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
NOTE: Clean side and rear windows before removal to 2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft
3. Release the header latches and leave the hooks in the
top. If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust,
loops on the windshield.
etc., clean them with a mild soap solution and a small
brush. Cleaning products are available through your
authorized dealer.
1. If your vehicle has half doors, remove each half-door
window by opening the door and lifting the half-door
window out.
NOTE: Stow the half-door windows carefully outside of
the vehicle, never inside, to avoid scratches.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Open the swing gate.
5. Before unzipping the rear window, release the first 3 in
(7.6 cm) of both sail panels from the channel. Remove
the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out
of the swing gate brackets.
• Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower
corner of the window. Pull the zipper up, across the
top and down to the left lower corner. Zipper pulls
will stay on the rear window. Pull down on the rear
window to disengage it from the zipper on the top
cover.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
6. Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate 9. Beginning from the rear lower corner, completely
bracket on both the left and right sides.
unzip the window.
3
7. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching.
8. Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear edge
of the side window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
10. Once unzipped, remove the side window retainers 12. As you begin to lower the top, fold the sail panels so
from the door channel and body side channel. Repeat
that they rest on top of the soft top.
this step on the opposite side.
11. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body
side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
13. The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed 14. Completely release the latches from the loops on the
unless the hard top is being installed. To remove the
windshield frame. If your vehicle is not equipped
swing gate brackets, pull the front of the bracket
with the Sunrider package, proceed to Step 15.
forward while rolling the entire bracket back in
toward the vehicle to disengage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
15. Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid rearward over 16. Unlatch the side bows from both door rails (Sunrider
the Sunrider link to lock in the link (Sunrider Models
Models only).
only).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
17. Before lowering the top, open the swing gate to
prevent possible damage to the rear center highmounted brake light. Move to the front of the vehicle.
Grasp the side bow behind the header and lift the
top, folding it toward the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE: Help from another person will ease this operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
18. Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the Raising The Soft Top
bows and as far inward as possible. This will keep
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
any portion of the top from flapping outside of the
2. Install door frames, if removed. Refer to “Door Frame”
vehicle.
in this section for further information.
3. Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid over Sunrider link
(Sunrider Models only).
19. Close the front header latches.
20. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer to “Door
Frame” in this section for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
4. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the top by the 5. Make sure the Sunrider bracket on the side bows
side bow and the 2–bow (middle bow) up and over the
latches to the door rails (Sunrider Models only).
sports bar until the header rests on the top of the
windshield frame.
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Open the header latches and engage the hook on each 7. If the swing gate brackets were removed, install them
side onto the windshield loops (do not close the
by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior
latches).
side of the body channel. Then, rotate it rearward and
over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of
the rail. To be properly located, the bracket must only
be clipped to the shortened rail edge.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
8. Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail 9. Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body
panels over the rear roof bow.
side channel, leaving the last 3 in (7.6 cm) toward the
rear window loose (on both sides). Pulling down on
the rear roof bow (3–bow) will aid to reach the channel
with the retainers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
10. To install the side windows, affix the window tem- 11. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
porarily by attaching to the Velcro in the rear corner.
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
Start the zipper but close only about 1 in (2.5 cm).
properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do
so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to
the window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
the Velcro along the top and rear of the window.
Repeat this step for the opposite side.
3
1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion
12. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the
window into the bottom side channel, beginning at
the front and working to the rear of the vehicle.
Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
13. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the swing gate
bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear
window. The spongy part of the seal should be down
and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate
when closed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
14. Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends
at the lower left corner of the rear window opening.
Ensure that the zippers are properly started and
aligned before zipping to prevent damage.
3
15. Run the zipper fully around to the right side of the
window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
16. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the
swing gate brackets.
18. Apply downward pressure on the top corner of the
rear soft top bow (3–bow), then complete attaching
the sail panel retainers into the body side channel.
17. Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate
bracket on both the left and right sides.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
19. Close the header latches and return the sun visors to SUNRIDER (TWO-DOOR MODELS) — IF
their secured position.
EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a
window while the top is wet may allow water to drip
into the vehicle’s interior.
NOTE: If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph
(64 km/h) with the Sunrider feature open, it is recommended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening The Sunrider
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Release the header latches from the loops on the
windshield frame.
4. Grasp the header and lift the top back. Make sure the
material is folded back as shown.
3. Make sure to slide the plastic sleeves forward to
unlock the Sunrider links.
NOTE: The Sunrider latch on the door rail should not be
activated for Sunrider use. If activated, the soft top must
be reinstalled starting from the sail panels.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
3
5. Locate the straps to secure the side bows. Wrap the 6. Reposition the sun visors.
straps around the bows as shown. Repeat on the other
side.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Closing The Sunrider
CAUTION!
1. Remove the straps from the side bows.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
3. Grasp the front header and pull it to the front of the
vehicle.
The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting,
or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was
not designed as a structural member of the vehicle, and
thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other
than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
4. Hook the header latches to the loops on the windshield frame, close latches, and return the sun visors to
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top
their original positions.
has been folded down for a period of time, the top will
5. Slide the plastic sleeve rearward over the Sunrider appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it
link.
difficult to put up. This is caused by a natural contraction
of the vinyl coating on the fabric top.
SOFT TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS
Please visit the Owners Manual on your DVD for Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top
fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and
instructional videos.
the top can then be snapped into place. If the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top
down or roll the rear or side curtains.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax buildup may
result.
• Do not lower the top when the temperature is
below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
• Do not lower the top when the windows are dirty.
Grit may scratch the window.
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or
fully lowered.
• Do not lower the top with the windows installed.
Window and top damage may occur.
• Refer to “Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It contains important information on cleaning
and caring for your vehicle’s fabric top.
• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or
force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing
the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top
framework when opening or closing. Damage to
the top may result.
WARNING!
• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window
curtain up unless the side curtains are also removed. Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the
vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers.
• The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed
only for protection against the elements. Do not
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident. Remember, always wear seat belts.
• Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch
points when installing and removing the soft tops.
The zippers and side bows may cause serious
injury if fingers or hands get caught in between.
• Careless handling and storage of the soft top may
damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
• The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to
leak into the vehicle’s interior.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
NOTE: Do not remove any of the three attachment knobs Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top
unless you are planning on installing the hard top.
1. Remove the side windows.
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove the back window.
3. Release header latches from the windshield frame.
NOTE: Start zipper from the right side to remove back
window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
4. Release the sail panel retainers from the body side 5. Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft
channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
top.
3
NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Fold header rearward, pulling the fabric to the rear.
7. Release Sunrider latch (both sides).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
3
8. Open the swing gate and lower the top.
NOTE: Ensure the fabric does not overhang the sides of
the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top
1. Open the swing gate and raise the top, engaging the
Sunrider latches (another person may be needed to
help with this operation).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
2. Install rear corner panels.
3. Rotate the header forward.
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Engage the header latches.
5. Install the back window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
6. Install the side windows.
7. To install the side windows, affix the window temporarily by attaching to the Velcro in the rear corner. Start
the zipper but close only about 1 in (2.5 cm).
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
8. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do
so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the
window.
1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
9. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the
window into the bottom side channel, beginning at the
front and working to the rear of the vehicle. Finish by
closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro
along the top and rear of the window. Repeat this step
for the opposite side.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Down The Soft Top
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Header Bow
2–Bow
3–Bow
4–Bow
Sail Panel
6 — Body Side Retainer
7 — Quarter Window
8 — Check Strap
9 — Front Retainer — Quarter Window
10 — Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
3
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Zipper Start
Zipper Finish
Swing Gate Bar
Swing Gate Brackets
Sail Panels
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Clean side and rear windows before removal to 3. Release the header latches and hooks from the loops
assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft
on the windshield frame.
top. If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust,
etc., clean them with a mild soap solution and a small
brush. Cleaning products are available through your
authorized dealer.
1. If your vehicle has half-doors, remove each half-door
window by opening the door and lifting the half-door
window out.
NOTE: Stow half-door windows carefully outside of the
vehicle, never inside, to avoid scratches.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
4. Open the swing gate.
5. Before unzipping the rear window, release the first 3 in
(7.6 cm) of both sail panels from the channel. Remove
the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out
of the swing gate brackets.
• Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower
corner of the window. Pull the zipper up, across the
top and down to the left lower corner. Zipper pulls
will stay on the rear window. Pull down on the rear
window to disengage it from the zipper on the top
cover.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate 8. Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear edge
bracket on both the left and right sides.
of the side window.
9. Beginning from the rear lower corner, completely
unzip the window.
7. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching.
10. Once unzipped, remove the side window retainers
from the door channel and body side channel. Repeat
this step on the opposite side.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
11. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body 12. Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft
side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
top.
3
NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
13. The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed 14. Grasp the front side bow behind the header, and lift
unless the hard top is being installed. To remove the
the top.
swing gate brackets, pull the front of the bracket
forward while rolling the entire bracket back in
toward the vehicle to disengage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
15. Fold back the front section of the top, pulling the 16. Fold the top so that the material forms a ⬙W⬙ as
fabric rearward. Gently rest the header on top of the
shown. Enter the vehicle and move the material into
rear portion of the deck.
two folds.
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
17. Release the side bows by pushing down on the latch
above the front of the rear door. Push the top
rearward to disengage. Repeat this step on the other
side.
slide the top along the door frame track to the rear
door frame.
19. Gently slide the side bows off the door frame track
and lower the top down into the vehicle.
18. Before lowering the top, open the swing gate to
NOTE: Help from another person will ease this operaprevent possible damage to the rear center hightion.
mounted brake light. Grasp the folded side bows and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
21. Once the top is fully down, use the Velcro straps
provided to secure the top to the vehicle by wrapping
the strap around the side bows and through the slot
on the body.
3
20. Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the
bows as far inside as possible. This will keep any
portion of the top from flapping outside of the
vehicle.
22. Close the front header latches.
23. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer to “Door
Frame” in this section for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Putting Up The Soft Top
NOTE: Be extremely careful when putting up the soft
top to prevent the doors from getting scratched. It may be
helpful to open the rear doors.
1. Install the door frames, if removed. Refer to “Door
Frame” in this section for further information.
2. Undo the straps used to secure the top in the down
position and store in secure location.
3. Open the swing gate.
4. Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the top of the
5. Insert the slider feature of the knuckles into the door
rear door frames.
frame tracks and slide the top forward.
NOTE: Help from another person will ease this operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
3
6. Ensure that the top locks into the Sunrider locking 7. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
mechanisms that are located above the front of the rear
doors.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
8. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the top by the
side bow until it rests on the windshield frame.
9. Open the header latches and engage the hook on each
side onto the windshield loops (do not close the
latches).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
10. If the swing gate brackets were removed, install them 11. Ensure that the straps are positioned correctly before
by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the
pulling the sail panels over the rear roof bow (4–
interior side of the body channel. Then, rotate it
bow).
rearward and over the channel until it snaps onto the
exterior part of the rail. To be properly located, the
bracket must only be clipped to the shortened rail
edge.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body side 12. To install the side windows, affix the window temchannel, leaving the last 3 in (7.6 cm) toward the rear
porarily by attaching it to the Velcro in the upper rear
window loose (on both sides). Pulling down on the rear
corner. Start the zipper but close only about 1 in (2.5
roof bow (4–bow) will aid in reaching the channel with
cm).
the retainers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
13. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do
so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to
the window.
3
1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion
14. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the
window into the bottom side channel, beginning at
the front and working to the rear of the vehicle.
Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the Velcro along the top and rear of the window.
Repeat this step for the opposite side.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
15. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the swing gate 16. Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends
bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear
at the lower left corner of the rear window opening.
window. The spongy part of the seal should be down
Ensure that the zippers are properly started and
and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate
aligned before zipping to prevent damage.
when closed.
17. Run the first zipper fully around to the right side of
the window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
18. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the 19. Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate
swing gate brackets.
bracket on both the left and right sides.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
20. Complete the installation of the sail panel by insert- SUNRIDER (FOUR-DOOR MODELS) — IF
ing the rest of the retainer into the body channel.
EQUIPPED
21. Close the header latches and return the sun visors to
their secured position.
CAUTION!
Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a
window while the top is wet may allow water to drip
into the vehicle’s interior.
NOTE: If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph
(64 km/h) with the Sunrider feature open, it is recommended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Make sure to slide the plastic sleeves forward to
unlock the Sunrider links.
Opening The Sunrider
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Release the header latches from the loops on the
windshield frame.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
4. Grasp the front side bow behind the header, and lift 5. Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest
the top.
the header on top of the rear portion of the deck.
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Fold the top so that the material forms a ⬙W⬙ as shown. 7. Secure the top by using the two provided straps. Each
Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds.
strap will wrap around the side bow and Velcro to
itself; use one strap on each side of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
remove the side bars and fold down the windshield,
drive slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that the
Perform the above steps in the opposite order.
speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph (16 km/h), with
NOTE: Failure to fold the fabric rearward will allow the low range operation preferred if you are driving off-road
material to sag and may block the rearview mirror.
with the windshield folded down.
Closing The Sunrider
FOLDING WINDSHIELD
The fold-down windshield and removable side bars on
your vehicle are structural elements that can provide
some protection in some accidents. The windshield also
provides some protection against weather, road debris
and intrusion of small branches and other objects.
Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars as soon as
the task that required their removal is completed and
before you return to on-road driving. Both you and your
passenger should wear seat belts at all times, on-road and
off-road, regardless of whether the windshield is raised
or folded down.
Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors. If
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield you choose to remove the doors, see your authorized
down and the side bars removed as you lose the protecdealer for a replacement cowl-mounted outside mirror.
tion these structural elements can provide.
Federal law requires outside mirrors on vehicles for
If required for certain off-road uses, the side bars can be on-road use.
removed and the windshield folded down. However, the
protection afforded by these features is then lost. If you
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Carefully follow these warnings to help protect
against personal injury:
• Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield down.
• Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is
securely fastened, either up or down.
• Eye protection, such as goggles, should be worn at
all times when the windshield is down.
• Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions
for raising the windshield. Make sure that the
folding windshield, windshield wipers, side bars,
and all associated hardware and fasteners are correctly and tightly assembled before driving your
vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may
prevent your vehicle from providing you and your
passengers protection in some accidents.
• If you remove the doors, store them outside the
vehicle. In the event of an accident, a loose door
may cause personal injury.
Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side
Bars
1. Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top following
the instructions in this manual.
NOTE: To assist in properly reinstalling side bars, mark
the original locations prior to removing.
2. Remove the two top hex bolts (13 mm), and the one
side hex bolt (13 mm) visible through the trim (Do not
remove plastic corner trim, sun visor bolts, or sport
bar covering).
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
7. Remove the one hex bolt (13 mm) visible through the
plastic trim on the bottom side of the side bar, one hex
bolt (13 mm) on the side of the side bar, and one hex
bolt (13 mm) on top of the side bar.
NOTE: Pull side bar out horizontally when removing.
3. Remove the sun visor.
4. Remove the A-pillar cap.
5. Disconnect microphone (if equipped with Uconnect
phone).
6. Open the sport bar Velcro covering.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Do not remove the head impact foam from the side
bars, as damage to the foam may result.
You or others could be injured if you carry the side
bars loose in your vehicle. Remove the side bars from
the vehicle or securely store them as described or
they may cause personal injury if an accident occurs.
See your authorized dealer for the cinch straps.
NOTE: Store all of the mounting bolts in their original
threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping.
8. Remove the side bar assembly, and reattach the sport
10. Remove the windshield wiper arms by first pulling
bar Velcro covering.
the wiper away from the windshield and out to the
“lock” position. Unsnap the wiper arm nut caps, and
9. To safely store the side bars in your vehicle, use four
remove the retaining nuts. Lift the wiper arms off and
cinch straps (available from your authorized dealer).
store them in the center console or securely behind
Attach the straps through the slots located on the floor
the rear seat.
behind the folded rear seat at the front of the storage
bin cover.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299
NOTE: It may be necessary to use a battery terminal 12. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the
puller tool in order to separate the wiper arms from the
rubber hood bumpers.
shaft after the nuts have been removed.
13. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap
11. Remove the lower windshield plates by removing the
through the footman hoop on the center of the hood
six black round-headed Torx head screws (using a #40
and on the center of the windshield frame. Tighten
Torx head driver) on each side of the base of the
the strap to secure the windshield in place.
windshield.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Attach the front of the side bar to the windshield
frame.
1. Raise the windshield.
• Install the top two hex bolts (13 mm) first, then the
2. Loosely attach the rear of the side bar to the sport bar.
lower side hex bolt (13 mm). The lower side bolt will
Refer to Step 4 of “Lowering Windshield And Removnot align until the top two bolts are installed.
ing Side Bars” earlier in this section.
Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bars
• Reattach the sport bar Velcro covering.
4. Tighten all side bar attachment bolts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301
5. Install the lower windshield plates with the six black REAR WINDOW FEATURES — HARD TOP ONLY
round-headed Torx head screws (using a #40 Torx
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped
head driver) on each side of the base of the windA rotary switch on the center portion of the control lever
shield.
(located on the right side of the steering column) controls
the operation of the rear wiper/washer function.
6. Reinstall the wiper arms.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the switch upward to the first detent Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped
position for rear wiper operation.
The rear window defroster button is located on
Rotate the switch upward past the first detent
the climate controls mode control knob. Push the
to activate the rear washer. The washer pump button to turn on the rear window defroster. An indicator
and the wiper will continue to operate as long in the button will illuminate when the rear window
as the switch is held. Upon release, the wiper defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
will cycle two to three times before returning to the set turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an addiposition.
tional five minutes of operation, push the button a
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned second time.
to the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
to the “Park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the window defroster only when the engine is operating.
wiper will resume function at whichever position the
switch is set at.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .309
▫ Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
▫ Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . .340
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .314
▫ Trip Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ EVIC Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Compass, Outside Temperature Display / ECO
䡵 COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER — IF
(Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .348
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
▫ Digital Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Average Fuel Economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . .366
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 䡵 UCONNECT 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . .367
▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . .367
▫ Vehicle Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For
CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display) . . . .353
▫ System Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Tire Pressure — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play. . . . . .378
▫ INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play . . . . .378
▫ Uconnect (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . . .379
䡵 UCONNECT 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 䡵 UCONNECT 230 – AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .358
(MP3/WMA AUX JACK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .384
CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
▫ Operation Instructions — DISC Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD – Video . . .392
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files. . . . . . . . .394
▫ LIST Button — DISC Mode For MP3/WMA
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ INFO Button — DISC Mode For MP3/WMA
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Uconnect (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . . .399
䡵 UCONNECT 430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Connecting An External USB Device . . . . . . . .405
▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . .409
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .411
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . .413
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . .413
䡵 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .404
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . .415
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Assist Handle
— Glove Compartment
— Power Window Switches
7 — Climate Controls
8 — Power Outlet
9 — Lower Switch Bank
10 — Power Mirror Switch — If Equipped
11 — Horn
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
1. Fuel Gauge
4. Temperature Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temwhen the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
perature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
points to the side of the
• The fuel pump symbol
satisfactorily.
vehicle where the fuel filler door is located.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem2. Speedometer
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
• Indicates vehicle speed.
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
3. Tachometer
operating range.
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
pointer in the red area. Engine damage will occur.
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
5. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Area
• The odometer display shows the total distance the
vehicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows
individual trip mileage. Refer to “Odometer/Trip
Odometer/ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) Button” for
further information.
• U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser
the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven.
If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer
reading the same as it was before the repair or
service. If they cannot do so, then the odometer must
be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the
door jamb stating what the mileage was before the
repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a
record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly
reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the
odometer must be reset at zero.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Vehicle Odometer Messages
CAUTION!
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument
cluster, all messages will display in the EVIC. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center — If Equipped”
in this section for further information.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature “HOTOIL” Warning message illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage or
transmission failure.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
WARNING!
odometer messages will display:
• ECO
If the Transmission Temperature “HOTOIL” Warning message is illuminated and you continue operat• door
ing the vehicle, in some circumstances you could
• gATE
cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot
• LoW tirE
engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
• HOTOIL
• gASCAP
6. Software Telltales
• noFUSE
• Hard and Soft Telltales (Symbols) appear based on
specific behaviors.
• CHAngE OIL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display / Compass Mini-Trip Computer Display — If
Equipped
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Mini-Trip Computer messages. Refer to
“Mini-Trip Computer” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Charging System Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s nonessential electrical devices or increase
engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is
experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an
authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
United States
Canada
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the
brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is
first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer
to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the light turns on while driving,
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return
to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE:
As the coolant temperature gauge approaches ⬙H,⬙ this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass ⬙H.⬙ In this
case, a continuous chime will sound until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes duration is expired, whichever come first.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Low Fuel Warning Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Warning Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.8 gal (10.6 L), this light will turn on and a
single chime will sound.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
In any situation in which the message on the display is ⬙See manual⬙, it is ESSENTIAL to
refer to the contents of the ⬙Wheels⬙ paragraph in the ⬙Technical data⬙ chapter, strictly complying with the indications that you find there.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for low tire pressure telltale.
those tires.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION! (Continued)
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 MPH (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused
the ESC activation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Front Axle Lock Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Axle Lock Indicator Light
Indicates when the front axle lock has been activated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been activated.
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
4WD Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive mode, and the front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Sway Bar Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the front sway bar is disconnected.
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The left or right arrow will flash with the corresponding exterior turn signal lights when the
turn signal lever is operated. A chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
NOTE:
If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Cruise Control On Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control On Indicator Light
This indicator shows when the electronic speed control system is turned on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Hill Decent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hill Decent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp
will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in
the “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will
flash on/off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER — IF
EQUIPPED
The Compass/Trip Computer features a driverinteractive display (displays information on outside temperature, compass direction, and trip information). It is
located on the lower left part of the cluster below the
speedometer.
Compass Display
Control Buttons
The Compass/Temperature control buttons are located
on the left spoke of the steering wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
The following displays can be reset or changed:
• Compass/Temperature
• AVG ECO (changes to present fuel economy)
• ET (will reset display)
Mini-Trip Control Buttons
• DTE (distance to empty)
Push and release the STEP button on the steering wheel
These messages can be cycled through by pushing the
to access the options in the Compass display.
STEP button on the steering wheel. To reset the AVG ECO
or ET, push and hold the STEP button for approximately
three seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass/Temperature Display
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with a Uconnect Navigation Radio, the NAV system will provide the compass
direction, and the variance and calibration menus will be
unavailable. The compass will perform accurately, based
on GPS signals instead of the Earth’s magnetic field.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
Compass Variance Map
the compass will automatically compensate for the differTo Set The Variance
ences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector
lever in the PARK position. Push and hold the RESET
button on the steering wheel (for approximately ten
seconds) until the current variance zone number is displayed. To change the zone, push and release the STEP
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
button to increase the variance one step. Repeat as 3. Release the RESET button, then push and hold again
for approximately 10 seconds, until the direction is
necessary until the desired variance is achieved.
displayed, with the CAL indicator on continuously in
NOTE: The factory default zone is 8. During programthe display.
ming, the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to
4. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle
zone 1.
in one or more complete 360–degree circles, under
Manual Compass Calibration
5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free from power lines and
If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate or abnormal,
large metallic objects, until the CAL indicator turns
you may wish to calibrate the compass. Prior to calibratoff. The compass will now function normally.
ing the compass, make sure the proper zone is selected.
NOTE:
1. Start the engine and leave the transmission in the
• A good calibration requires a level surface and an
PARK position.
environment free from large metallic objects such as
2. Push and hold the RESET button (for approximately
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad
10 seconds) until the current variance zone number is
tracks, etc.
displayed.
• Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top
of the center of the instrument panel. This is where the
compass sensor is located.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Average Fuel Economy / Distance To Empty (DTE)
/ Elapsed Time
• Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. in the RUN or START positions. The elapsed timer
When the fuel economy is reset, the digits will go blank displays minutes:seconds. After 59minutes:59seconds, it
while the history information is erased. The averaging displays hours:minutes:seconds.
will restart when enough new distance and fuel data is Trip Conditions
accumulated.
Trip Odometer (ODO) / ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator)
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
— If Equipped
• Average Fuel Economy
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset.
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Push and release the right button (on the instrument cluster) to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B
or to ECO. Push and hold the right button while the
odometer/trip odometer is displayed to reset.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last
reset.
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Trip Display Button
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last
reset.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pushing the switches
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the following:
instrument cluster.
• Compass Heading (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
• Outside Temperature (°F or °C)
• ECO Display
• Digital Speedometer
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance To Empty
• Tire Pressure Monitor System — If Equipped
• Elapsed Time
• Vehicle Info
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• EVIC Units Selection
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
• System Status and Warnings (Door Ajar, etc.)
• MENU Button
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
Push and release the MENU button to advance
the display to each of the EVIC Main Menu
The system allows the driver to select information by
features or to return to the Main Menu from a
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
sub-menu. Upon reaching the last item in the
wheel:
Main Menu the EVIC will advance to the first item in the
Main Menu with the next MENUbutton push and
release.
• COMPASS Button
Push and release the COMPASS button to
return to the Compass/Outside Temperature/
Audio Information/ECO screen whenever the
current display is not the Compass/Outside
Temperature/Audio Information/ECO screen.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• RIGHT Arrow Button
• Service TPM System (refer to ⬙Tire Pressure Monitoring System⬙ in ⬙Starting and Operating⬙)
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button
when prompted by the EVIC to Reset Main • Damaged Key
Menu features with a reset capability or to
• Key in Ignition
change Personal Settings.
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
• DOWN Arrow Button
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
Push and release the DOWN arrow button
when prompted by the EVIC to step through • Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
Vehicle Info submenu or stored system warn• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
ing messages or Personal Settings features.
chime)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays • Key Fob Battery Low (with a single chime)
the following messages:
• Low Tire Pressure
• Personal Settings Not Avail. – Vehicle Not in Park —
automatic transmission
• Low Fuel
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
• Personal Settings Not Avail. – Vehicle in Motion — EVIC Main Menu
manual transmission
To step to each main menu feature push and release the
• Door Open (with vehicle graphic showing which door MENU button once for each step. A step from the last
is open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in item in the list will cause the first item in the feature list
to be displayed. The following features are in the Main
motion).
menu:
• Gate Open (with vehicle graphic showing the
Liftgate/back door open and a single chime sounds if • Compass, Outside Temperature, and ECO display
the vehicle is in motion)
• Digital Speedometer
• Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting •
And Operating” for further information)
•
• Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
•
• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped
•
Average Fuel Economy
Distance to Empty
Tire Pressure — If Equipped
Elapsed Time
• Vehicle Information
• Coolant Temp
• Oil Pressure
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
arrow but• Transmission Temp — Automatic Transmission Only seconds without pushing the RIGHT
ton,
RESET
ALL
will
return
to
RESET
and
only the
• Oil Life Remaining (Automatic Oil Change Indicaselected
feature
will
have
been
reset.
tor)
• EVIC Units Selection
Compass, Outside Temperature Display / ECO
(Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped
• System Status and Warnings
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing. Push and release the COMPASS button to display
one
of eight compass headings, the outside temperature/
NOTE: For features in the EVIC that can be reset (Average
ECO
if the EVIC display is not already displaying this
Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time), the EVIC prompts a reset
screen.
arrow button graphic and the word
with the RIGHT
RESET next to it.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
• Personal Settings
When the RIGHT
arrow button is pushed, the
selected feature will reset and RESET ALL will display
arrow button . Pushing the
next to the RIGHT
arrow button a second time will reset both
RIGHT
Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time. After three
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in
the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function
The ECO message will display below the outside temnormally.
perature in the EVIC display (if the audio system is on
the ECO indicator will override the audio information NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
display line if the ⬙Display Fuel Saver⬙ personal setting is an environment free from large metallic objects such as
ON — see ⬙Personal Settings⬙ section). This message will buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
appear whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient etc.
manner.
Manual Compass Calibration
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” indicator
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
Automatic Compass Calibration
1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic, and the EVIC will 2. Push the MENU button until Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) displays in the
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
EVIC.
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Push the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the top of the instrument panel; this is where the compass
displays in the EVIC.
sensor is located.
4. Push and release the RIGHT button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will display in the
EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
“CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now
function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Compass Variance Map
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
To Change The Compass Variance:
Average Fuel Economy
1. Turn the ignition switch RUN (it is not necessary to Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. Average
Fuel Economy can be reset by pushing and holding the
start the engine).
arrow button (as prompted in the EVIC
RIGHT
2. Push the MENU button until Personal Settings display). Upon reset, the history information will be
(Customer-Programmable Features) displays in the erased, and the averaging will continue from the last
EVIC.
fuel average reading before the reset.
3. Push the DOWN button until “Compass Variance” Distance To Empty (DTE)
message and the last variance zone number displays
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
in the EVIC.
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
4. Push and release the RIGHT button until the proper determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
variance zone is selected according to the map.
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset.
5. Push and release the COMPASS button to exit.
Digital Speedometer
Shows the actual vehicle speed in mph or km/h.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE display value.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.” This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
LOW FUEL text, and a new DTE value will display.
Elapsed Time
Vehicle Information
Push and release the MENU button until “Vehicle Information” displays in the EVIC. Then, push the DOWN
arrow button to display any one of the following
choices:
• Coolant Temperature
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset. Shows the actual coolant temperature.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is • Oil Pressure
in the RUN or START position.
Shows the actual oil pressure.
Elapsed time displays Minutes: seconds.
• Transmission Temperature — Automatic TransmisAfter 59 minutes: 59 seconds are reached, Hours: Min- sion Only
utes: Seconds will be displayed.
Shows the actual transmission fluid temperature.
Elapsed time can be reset by pushing and holding the
RIGHT
arrow button (as prompted in the EVIC • Oil Life Remaining (Automatic Oil Change Indicadisplay). Upon reset, all digits will change to zeros and tor) — If Equipped
time will start again if the ignition switch is in RUN or Shows the oil life measured in percentage.
START.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
will display in the EVIC display for approximately 5
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display)
your personal driving style.
Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature,
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each Average Fuel Economy and Distance to Empty features.
arrow button to toggle
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To Push and release the DOWN
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the units between ⬙U.S.⬙ and ⬙METRIC.⬙
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform
the following procedure:
Oil Change Required
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Do not
start the engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
System Warnings
Displays “SYSTEM OK” if there are no active Warning
Messages stored. Pushing and releasing the DOWN
arrow button when “SYSTEM OK” is displayed
will do nothing. Displays “SYSTEM WARNINGS
PRESENT” if there are active Warning Messages
arrow
stored. Pushing and releasing the DOWN
button when “SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT” is
displayed will display each stored warning for each
button push. Push and release the MENU button to
return to the Main Menu.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Push and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC.
Use the DOWN
arrow button to display one of the
following choices:
Language
When in this display you may select one of five languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Push
the RIGHT button while in this display to select English,
Espanol or Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language.
Auto Lock Doors — IF Equipped
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph (0 km/h)
(manual transmission) or when the shift lever is in PARK
(auto transmission).
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or
disabled, to make your selection, push and release the
RIGHT button until “On” or “Off” appears.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Auto Unlock On Exit
Sound Horn With Lock
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position, and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, push and release the RIGHT button
until “On” or “Off” appears.
When on is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pushed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lamp with
Lock feature. To make your selection, push and release
the RIGHT button until “On” or “Off” appears.
RKE Unlock — If Equipped
Flash Lamp with Lock
When “Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
“Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, you must push the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When “All Doors 1st Press” is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first push of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, push and release the RIGHT button until “Driver
Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
When on is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the Sound Horn with Lock feature selected. To
make your selection, push and release the RIGHT button
until “On” or “Off” appears.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, push and release
the RIGHT button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature.
To make your selection, push and release the RIGHT
When on is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
button until “Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” or “10 min.”
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxiappears.
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. If the
headlights were turned on by this feature, they will also Illumin. Approach
turn off when the wipers are turned off. To make your
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
selection, push and release the RIGHT arrow button
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selecNOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime tion, push and hold the RIGHT button until “Off,” “30
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the sec,” “60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears.
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
When “On” is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
Key Off Power Delay
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
When this feature is selected, the power window Operating” for system function and operating informaswitches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), DVD tion. To make your selection, push and release the
arrow button until “On” or “Off” appears.
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), RIGHT
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
Headlamps with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
information will display in the audio information/ECO
line of the display when the audio system is on. To make
The EVIC can be changed between English and Metric
your selection, push and release the RIGHT button until
units of measure. The units apply to the Outside Tem“ON” or “OFF” appears.
perature, Average Fuel Economy, and Distance to Empty.
To make your selection, push and release the RIGHT Compass Variance
button until “U.S.” or ⬙METRIC⬙ appears.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Nav–Turn By Turn — If Equipped
Display Units In
When on enables display of Navigation System street Calibrate Compass
name, turn direction, and distance to turn information in
Push the RIGHT arrow button to calibrate the compass.
the EVIC. To make your selection, push and release the
Tire Pressure — If Equipped
RIGHT button until “On” or “Off” appears.
Push and release the MENU button until “Tire PSI/kpa:”
displays in the EVIC. It shows a graphic of the vehicle
The “ECO” message is located in the compass/outside
with a tire pressure value at each corner of the graphic.
temperature/audio information/ECO display. If Display
Fuel Saver is selected as ON, only the ECO message will
display in the audio information/ECO line of the display.
If Display Fuel Saver is selected as OFF, only the audio
Display Fuel Saver — If Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
UCONNECT 130
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
SEEK Buttons
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
ACC position to operate the radio.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
another selection. Holding either button will bypass 5. To exit, push any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
stations without stopping, until you release it.
RW/FF
TIME Button
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
radio frequency.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Clock Setting Procedure
TUNE Control
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
SCROLL control knob.
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
will begin to blink.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Push the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Memory
treble tones.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET/RND
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and push and release that button. If a button
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
is not selected within five seconds after pushing the
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
the front and rear speakers.
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pushing the pushbutton twice.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
button number will display.
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
Buttons 1 - 6
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
stations).
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
DISC Button
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
Pushing the DISC button will allow you to switch from the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 inch (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must
be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
Push the EJECT button to eject the CD.
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped.)
SEEK Button
Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
the current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Push this button while the CD is playing to activate
CD and MP3 modes.
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
TIME Button
change of pace.
Push this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
RW/FF
Push and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD Push the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or Notes On Playing MP3 Files
RW or another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse)
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file
button operates in a similar manner.
recording media and formats are limited. When writing
AM/FM Button
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
writing⬙ are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result
• Maximum number of files: 255
in longer disc loading times.
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of Supported MP3 File Formats
files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenthe file name and folder name, and will assign a number sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceed- designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
ing 50 folders will result in this display.)
not play the file.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback Of MP3 Files
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected MP3 player, or iPod, and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system to amplify the source and play through the
by the following:
vehicle speakers.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
Pushing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
CD-R media
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
to load than non-multisession discs
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
increase with more files and folders
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option Push this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
before writing to the disc.
OFF).
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
UCONNECT 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
SEEK Buttons
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
position to operate the radio.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
another selection. Holding either button will bypass Phone Button Uconnect Phone — If Equipped
stations without stopping, until you release it.
Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “UnderVoice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone — If
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
Equipped
screen.
Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Under- TIME Button
Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
radio frequency.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Clock Setting Procedure
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
screen.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/ INFO Button
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Push the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
will begin to blink.
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
SCROLL control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL con- RW/FF
trol knob to save time change.
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
5. To exit, push any button/knob or wait five seconds. causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
The clock can also be set by pushing the SETUP button. direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, push the AM or FM frequencies.
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select TUNE Control
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
radio, push the SETUP button and then follow the above to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
procedure, starting at step 2.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
treble tones.
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Program Type
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
16-Digit Character
Display
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is AM/FM Button
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode. SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton
Memory
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET/RND
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
SETUP Button
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select between station and push and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pushing the SET/RND
the following items:
button, the station will continue to play but will not be
• Set Clock — Pushing the SELECT button will allow
stored into pushbutton memory.
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
hours, push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL con- display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
trol knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
save time change.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by MP3 Audio Play
pushing the pushbutton twice.
NOTE:
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
button number will display.
to operate the radio.
Buttons 1 - 6
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
stations).
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
DISC/AUX Button
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Pushing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1 inch (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
Push the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
(Continued)
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped.)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
SEEK Button
AM/FM Button
Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.
TIME Button
Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Push this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Push this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Push the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
RW/FF
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
Push and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse) button file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricworks in a similar manner.
tions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
the file name and folder name, and will assign a number
instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20
folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
• Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of in longer disc loading times.
files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
Layer
3
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
VBR bit rates.
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback Of MP3 Files
LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Pushing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pushing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
by the following:
playable files).
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
Pushing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
to load than non-multisession discs
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Push the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option Push and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more
and the radio will display song titles for each file.
before writing to the disc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
Push and hold the INFO button again for three seconds Uconnect (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chilplayer and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
source and play through the vehicle speakers.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxillimited coverage in Alaska.
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
System Activation
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welTIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
come kit that contains general information, including
Push this button to change the display to time of day. The how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
visit the Sirius web site at www.siriusxm.com, or at display will time out in two minutes. Push any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
www.siriusxm.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Selecting Uconnect (Satellite) Mode
Push the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
Please have the following information available when CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
calling:
mode.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Satellite Antenna
Number (ESN/SID).
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
ESN/SID Access
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posion or above the antenna.
tion and the radio on, push the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
Reception Quality
SEEK Buttons
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
following reasons:
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
structure or under a physical obstacle.
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the stations without stopping, until you release it.
form of short audio mutes.
SCAN Button
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
cause intermittent reception.
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can tinuing to the next. To stop the search, push the SCAN
button a second time.
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions — Uconnect (Satellite)
Mode
INFO Button
Pushing the INFO button will cycle the display informaNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pushing and holding the INFO button for an
ACC position to operate the radio.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
additional three seconds will make the radio display the Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
Song Title all of the time (push and hold again to return type.
to normal display).
By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
RW/FF
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
direction of the arrows.
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SETUP Button
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type • Display Sirius ID number — Push the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
mode for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
Sirius subscription.
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET button. The
symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and push and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pushing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Understanding The FeaYou may add a second channel to each pushbutton by tures Of Your Vehicle”.
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton
twice.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT 230 – AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND
6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK)
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC will remain tuned to the new station until you make
position to operate the radio.
Uconnect 230
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
another selection. Holding either button will bypass Phone Button Uconnect Phone — If Equipped
stations without stopping, until you release it.
Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect Phone” for further
SCAN Button
details.
Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
the search, push the SCAN button a second time.
screen.
Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone — If
Equipped
TIME Button
Push the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature and frequency display.
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further
Clock Setting Procedure
details.
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/ RW/FF
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
will begin to blink.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
SCROLL control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL con- or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
trol knob to save the time change.
TUNE Control
5. To exit, push any button/knob or wait five seconds.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
The clock can also be set by pushing the SETUP button and to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in this
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
display follow the above procedure, starting at step 2.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
INFO Button
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
Push the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ format types:
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
16-Digit Character
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Program Type
Display
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
No program type or
None
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
undefined
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
the front and rear speakers.
Classical
Classicl
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Classic Rock
Cls Rock
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
College
College
MUSIC TYPE Button
Country
Country
Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Foreign Language
Language
mode for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
16-Digit Character
Display
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R & B
Program Type
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
• DVD Enter — When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
• DVD Play Options — Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
• Subtitle — Repeatedly pushing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc (if equipped).
• Audio Stream — Repeatedly pushing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
• Angle — Repeatedly pushing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
• DISC Play/Pause —
NOTE:
SETUP Button
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
You can toggle between playing the DVD and • The available selections for each of the above entries
pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT
varies depending upon the disc.
button (if equipped).
• These selections can only be made while playing a
DVD.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Power — Allows you to turn the power ON and OFF Menu Language — If Equipped
(if equipped).
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
• Lock — Locks out rear remote controls (if equipped). default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
• CH1/CH2 — Allows the user to change the mode of
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pushing
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
• Set Home Clock — Pushing the SELECT button number and then push to select.
allows you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Audio Language — If Equipped
control knob to adjust the hours and then push and
turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
minutes. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again language (effective only if the language is supported by
to save changes.
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
• Player Defaults — Selecting this item will allow the
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
user to scroll through the following items and set
to select the number and then push to select.
defaults according to customer preference.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
Subtitles — If Equipped
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
Off or On.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
Audio DRC — If Equipped
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
customer-preferred settings.
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
AM and FM Buttons
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
Push the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET button. The
symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and push and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pushing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pushing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — DISC Mode For CD And
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD – Video
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match for
the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does
not match the region code for the radio DVD player, it
will not play the disc. Customers may take their vehicle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
player a maximum of five times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Push the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Push the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
4
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is TIME Button (CD MODE)
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Push this button to change the display from a large CD
Push and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. Push and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
another CD button is pushed. The RW (Rewind) button
Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
works in a similar manner.
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the AM Or FM Button (CD MODE)
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
the current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
Push the SCAN button to scan through each track on the following restrictions.
CD currently playing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeThe MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
character extension)
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeDVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
character extension)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
files properly and may be unable to play the file nordiscs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
• Maximum number of files: 255
Supported Media (Disc Types)
• Maximum number of folders: 100
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
WMA
Specification
WMA
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
44.1 and 48
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
Bit Rate (kbps)
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
supported.
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
Playback Of MP3/WMA Files
before writing to the disc.
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium LIST Button — DISC Mode For MP3/WMA Play
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more Pushing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
folder by pushing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
affected by the following:
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer The folder list will time out after five seconds.
to load than non-multisession discs
INFO Button — DISC Mode For MP3/WMA Play
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will Pushing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
increase with more files and folders
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
time⬙ priority mode.
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is
Push and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
and radio will display song titles for each file.
Push and hold the INFO button again for three seconds SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
No function.
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which No function.
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
MP3/WMA player, an ipod, or a microphone and utilize
the vehicles audio system to amplify the source and play
No function.
through the vehicle speakers.
Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Push the TIME button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for five seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
Macrovision
No function.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect Phone” for further details.
DTS
“DTS and “DTS 2.0” are trademarks of Digital Theater
Systems, Inc.
Uconnect (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
Dolby
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcastManufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Laboratories.
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil- Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. Number (ESN/SID)
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has Please have the following information available when
calling:
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.siriusxm.com, or at
www.siriusxm.ca for Canadian residents.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, push the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Push any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
Selecting Uconnect (Satellite) Mode
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
Push the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio • Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
mode.
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects Operating Instructions — Uconnect (Satellite)
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause Mode
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly ACC position to operate the radio.
on or above the antenna.
SEEK Buttons
Satellite Antenna
Reception Quality
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
following reasons:
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking another selection. Holding either button will bypass
structure or under a physical obstacle.
stations without stopping, until you release it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con- to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, push the SCAN
MUSIC TYPE Button
button a second time.
Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type
INFO Button
mode for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button
Pushing the INFO button will cycle the display informa- or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail- seconds will allow the program format type to be seable). Also, pushing and holding the INFO button for an lected.
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
Song Title all of the time (push and hold again to return
type.
to normal display).
By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type
RW/FF
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons channel with the same selected Music Type name.
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
direction of the arrows.
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
SETUP Button
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Push the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton
twice.
SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to button number will display.
commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET button. The Buttons 1 - 6
symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
and push and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pushing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT 430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF
EQUIPPED
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If
Equipped
• Connecting an electronic audio device to the AUX port
located in the radio faceplate, plays media, but does
not use the control feature to control the connected
device.
This feature allows an external USB device to be plugged
Refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual for detailed into the USB port, located in the center console.
operating instructions.
NOTE:
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
— If Equipped
Uconnect Supplement Manual for external USB device
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
support capability.
Refer to “Uconnect Phone” for further details.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
device may take a few minutes to connect), the audio
device starts charging and is ready for use by pushing
Use a connection cable to connect an external USB device
radio switches, as described below.
to the vehicles USB/AUX connector port which is located
in the center console.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the control system
until a minimum charge is attained. Leaving the audio
device connected to the control system may charge it to
the required level.
Connecting An External USB Device
Using This Feature
By using an external USB device to connect to the USB
port:
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod contents.
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicles USB/MP3 control system (external USB
Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into • Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device).
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or push the VR
Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device
button and say ⬙Next Track.⬙
Using Radio Buttons
To enter the iPod/USB/MP3 control mode and access a • Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
connected audio device, either push the “AUX” button
will jump to the previous track in the list or push the
on the radio faceplate or push the VR button and say
VR button and say ⬙Previous Track.⬙
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB.⬙ Once in the iPod/USB/MP3
• Jump backward in the current track by pushing and
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
long enough will jump to the beginning of the current
Play Mode
track.
When switched to iPod/USB/MP3 control mode, the • Jump forward in the current track by pushing and
iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play
holding the FF >> button.
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB • A single push backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five secdevice and display data:
onds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. Pushing the SEEK >> button
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
list, or push the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
Track.⬙
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, when it is playing the track, push the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pushing the
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previous
and next tracks.
• While a track is playing, push the INFO button to see • RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pushing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pushing the INFO button again jumps to
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB
device, or push the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
the next screen of data for that track. Once all screens
⬙Shuffle Off.⬙ If the RND icon is showing on the radio
have been viewed, the last INFO button push will go
back to the play mode screen on the radio.
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
• Pushing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
push the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off.⬙
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pushing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
• Push the SCAN button to use iPod/USB/MP3 device audio device.
scan mode, which will play the first ten seconds of
each track in the current list and then forward to the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions in In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external
USB device:
or external USB device.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
played is highlighted on the radio display, push the
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay
in updating the information on the radio display may
be noticeable.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
Pushing a PRESET button will display the current list on
During all List modes, the iPod displays all lists in
the top line and the first item in that list on the second line.
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of
the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclockwise) To exit List mode without selecting a track, push the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
to get to the track faster.
LIST button: The LIST button will display the top level
menu of the iPod or external USB device.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
• Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item
to be selected and push the TUNE control knob. This
will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio
device.
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Placing items on the iPod or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
4
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect phone system.
Refer to the Uconnect Radio Supplement for further
information on Bluetooth connectivity.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect
phone system to list the audio devices.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To enter BTSA mode, push either “AUX” button on the
button and say “Bluetooth Next Track
radio or push the VR
Streaming Audio.”
Use the SEEK UP button, or push the VR
button on
the radio and say “Next Track,” to jump to the next
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can music track on your cellular phone.
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect phone system, but just one can be selected and
played.
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or push the VR
button
on the radio and say “Previous Track,” to jump to the
previous music track on your cellular phone.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth Streaming
Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is
playing will display info.
Selecting A Different Audio Device
1. Push the Phone
Previous Track
button to begin.
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and following the beep, say
⬙Setup⬙, then say ⬙Select Audio Devices.⬙
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear push-button in the center and controls the volume and
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
access the switches.
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/HDD/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The button located in the center of the left-hand control CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
grammed in the radio preset button.
precautions:
CD Player
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
surface.
track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
wiping from center to edge.
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
player.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
Under certain conditions, the mobile device being on in manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from body.
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
by relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is
found in radio frequency safety standards and recomnot harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
community.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile device operation when
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless NOTE:
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitwith the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
provide reasonable protection against harmful intersituations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If
ference in a residential installation. This equipment
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
2. This device must accept any interference received,
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
including interference that may cause undesired opencouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
eration.
more of the following measures:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician Blower Control
for help.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are seven blower
speeds.
Temperature Control
Manual Temperature Controls
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures, while rotating
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
4
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt
or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
Air Conditioning Control
• MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, turn on the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
• ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
Push this button to engage the Air Mode Control (Air Direction)
Conditioning. A light will illuminate
Rotate this control to choose from sevwhen the Air Conditioning system is
eral patterns of air distribution. You
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the
can select either a primary mode as
blue area of the scale indicates cooler
identified by the symbols on the contemperatures, while rotating right into
trol, or a blend of two of these modes.
the red area indicates warmer
The closer the setting is to a particular
temperatures.
symbol, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about ten seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
• Panel
• Floor
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow.
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demist outlets.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed • Mix
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
for maximum airflow to the rear.
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
• Bi-Level
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there • Defrost
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
Air is directed through the windshield and side
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiThis feature gives improved comfort during sunny but mum blower and temperature settings for best windcool conditions.
shield and side window defrosting.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix, NOTE:
Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pushed. This dehuthe inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
Recirculation Control
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
Pushing the Recirculation Control button will
the outside air position for maximum defogging.
put the system in recirculation mode. This can
be used when outside conditions such as • The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are preswhen the recirculation button is pushed and the mode
ent. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the
control is set to panel or Bi-Level.
control button to illuminate.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
occupants only.
Temperature Control
Automatic Temperature Controls
Automatic Operation
The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
Operation of the system is quite simple.
Dial in the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by rotating
the Temperature Control knob. Once
the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system. Should
the desired comfort level require air
conditioning, the system will automatically make the
adjustment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
system completely and closes the outside air intake.
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
The recommended setting for maximum comfort is 72° F
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
(22° C) for the average person; however, this may vary.
reducing air conditioning performance.
NOTE:
• While operating in AUTO, the system will not auto• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
matically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the
without affecting automatic operation.
windshield. The defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
• Pushing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
air conditioning is not necessary.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
Blower Control
For full automatic operation or for
automatic blower operation, turn the
knob to the AUTO position. In manual
mode, there are seven blower speeds
that can be individually selected. In off
position, the blower will shut off.
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control is a difference in temperature between the upper and
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions:
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
• Panel
cool conditions.
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru• Floor
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow.
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
side window demist outlets.
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
• Mix
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Recirculation Control
• Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pushing the Recirculation
Control button will put the system in recirculation mode. This can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity
• Air Conditioner Control
are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in
Push this button to turn on the air the control button to illuminate.
conditioning during manual operation
NOTE:
only. When the air conditioning is
turned on, cool dehumidified air will • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
flow through the outlets selected with
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
the Mode control dial. Push this button a second time to turn OFF the air • In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
mode is not allowed in the defrost mode in order to
manual compressor operation is selected.
improve window clearing. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if in defrost mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
push the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
recirculation to be selected while in defrost mode.
Attempting to use recirculation while in this mode will
cause the LED in the control button to blink and then
turn off.
Operating Tips
• Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
mode by pushing the Recirculation button. However,
under certain conditions, while in Automatic mode,
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation
button is pushed, the indicator will flash and then turn
off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
Recirculation mode at this time. If you would like the
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
system to go into Recirculation mode, you must first
move the Mode knob to Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, or Mix
and then push the Recirculation button. This feature
reduces the possibility of window fogging.
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Winter Operation
Window Fogging
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly reis not recommended because it may cause window moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
fogging.
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side winVacation Storage
dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air rainy or humid weather.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility long periods as fogging may occur.
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
Side Window Demisters
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
Floor, Mix, or Defrost mode. The air is directed at the area
of the windows through which you view the outside
mirrors.
The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from
entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for filter service intervals.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .434
▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .434
▫ Reverse Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .444
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .437
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .438
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Side Step Removal — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . .463
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ The Basics Of Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . .464
䡵 FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
(COMMAND-TRAC I OR ROCK-TRAC) . . . . . .453
▫ When To Use 4L (Low) Range. . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Operating Instructions/Precautions . . . . . . . .454
▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation. . .465
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
䡵 TRAC-LOK REAR AXLE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .458
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
䡵 AXLE LOCK (TRU–LOK) — RUBICON
MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . .
䡵 ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT — IF
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . .
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check
䡵 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . .
䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .481
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .481
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . .483 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .509
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .512
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped . . .497
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .536
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .521
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .522
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .523 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ Base TPM System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
▫ Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUinside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
TRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch
WARNING!
pedal is pressed to the floor.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Four-Wheel Drive Models Only
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with In 4L mode, this vehicle will start regardless of whether
access to an unlocked vehicle.
or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. This feature
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is enhances off-road performance by allowing the vehicle to
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or start when in 4L without having to press the clutch pedal.
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- The “4WD Indicator Light” will illuminate when the
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
transfer case has been shifted into this mode.
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
in a location accessible to children. A child could Start the vehicle with the shift lever in the PARK position
operate power windows, other controls, or move (vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL). Apply the
the vehicle.
brake before shifting to any driving range.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
Starting” procedure.
pedal.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition switch to the an externally powered electric engine block heater (availLOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
If Engine Fails To Start
Tip Start Feature — Automatic Transmission Only
Normal Starting
Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will continue to run, but will automatically disengage
itself when the engine is running. If the engine fails to
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and, once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
Without Tip Start — Manual Transmission Only
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15If the engine fails to start after you have followed the second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce- held to the floor, repeat the “Normal Starting” or “Exdures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all treme Cold Weather” procedures.
the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
With Tip Start — Automatic Transmission Only
After Starting
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
CAUTION!
The engine block heater cord is found under the hood
bundled in front of the battery tray.
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid
warms up. This is normal.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
You should always use first gear when starting from a
standing position.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both
fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as
listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily
loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift
speeds may not apply.
Shift Pattern
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine
3.6L
Speeds
Accel.
Cruise
Manual Transmission
1 to 2
15 (24)
10 (16)
Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
2 to 3
3 to 4
24 (39)
34 (55)
19 (31)
27 (43)
NOTE: Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for
2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.
4 to 5
47 (76)
37 (60)
5 to 6
56 (90)
41 (66)
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip, and the vehicle could skid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears
at higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine
and clutch systems, Any attempt to shift into lower
gear with clutch pedal depressed may result damage to the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear
and releasing the clutch may result in engine
damage.
• When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the
engine which can cause engine damage, and/or
clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
If transfer case is in low range the vehicle speeds to
cause engine and clutch damage are significantly
lower.
• Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause the engine damage
and/or damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal
is pressed.
• Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal
depressed could result in clutch damage.
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed
and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch
pedal is pressed.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Selection
Maximum Speed
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
6 to 5
5 to 4
4 to 3
3 to 2
80 (129)
70 (113)
50 (81)
30 (48)
2 to 1
15 (24)
NOTE: Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for warns the driver that they are about to shift the trans2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be signifi- mission into REVERSE. Due to this feature, a slow shift to
REVERSE can be perceived as a high shift effort.
cantly less.
Reverse Shifting
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
To shift into REVERSE, bring the vehicle to a complete
stop. Press the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear
train to stop rotating. Beginning from the NEUTRAL
position, move the shift lever in one quick, smooth
motion straight across and into the REVERSE area (the
driver will feel a firm “click” as the shifter passes the
“knock-over”). Complete the shift by pulling the shift
lever into REVERSE.
The “knock-over” provides a resistance to the driver
from accidentally entering the REVERSE shift area and
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
Key Ignition Park Interlock
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter- out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/ pedal must be pressed.
OFF (key removal) position. The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF position, and once removed the transmission
is locked in PARK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever
out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the Autostick shift control (refer to
⬙AutoStick⬙ in this section). Moving the shift lever to the
left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position will
manually select the transmission gear and will display
the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
5
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Shift Lever
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
vehicle in this range.
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
NOTE:
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
• After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow brake.
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
especially important when the engine is cold.
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffithe ignition to the LOCK/OFF position before restart- cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
ing. Transmission gear engagement may be delayed precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
after restarting the engine if the ignition is not cycled downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
to the LOCK/OFF position first.
grade.
Gear Ranges
PARK (P)
NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transfer case is in a drive position.
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
gear selector/shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the transmission is
(Continued)
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Before moving the gear selector/shift lever out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition switch from the
LOCK/OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and
also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to
the gear selector/shift lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position (P):
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
5
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
Transmission Limp Home Mode
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will
remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear
is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these condi- In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
tions, using a lower gear will improve performance and can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting following steps:
and heat buildup.
1. Stop the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
Overdrive Operation
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present:
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no • The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal • Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
operation.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your AUTOSTICK
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could providing manual shift control, giving you more control
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
dealer service is required.
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
This system can also provide you with more control result. It will remain in the selected gear until another
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situa- below.
tions.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when necessary to prevent engine over-speed.
Operation
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the • Heavily pressing the accelerator pedal will generate an
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
automatic downshift (for improved acceleration) when
the five available gears. To engage AutoStick, simply tap
reasonable.
the shift lever to the right or left (+/-) while in the DRIVE
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
position. Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick mode will downvehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
shift the transmission to the next lower gear, while using
display the current gear.
(+) to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear.
When AutoStick is active, the current transmission gear is • The transmission will automatically downshift to first
displayed in the instrument cluster.
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
vehicle is accelerated.
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second
gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in
snowy or icy conditions.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged. FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION (COMMAND• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when TRAC I OR ROCK-TRAC)
AutoStick is engaged.
NOTE: When the transfer case is in the 4L (Low) range,
the transmission will shift automatically (but no higher
than the displayed gear).
To disengage AutoStick mode, hold the shift lever to the
right (+) until ⬙D⬙ is once again displayed in the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
mode at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not
drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
Operating Instructions/Precautions
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
• 2H (Two-wheel drive high range)
• 4H (Four-wheel drive high range)
• N (Neutral)
• 4L (Four-wheel drive low range)
Four-Wheel Drive Shift Lever
The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions such
as hard-surfaced roads.
In the event that additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the
front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L
positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces
only and not intended for normal driving. Driving in the
4H and 4L positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components. Refer to “Shifting Procedures” in this section for
further information on shifting into 4H or 4L.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will
be approximately three times (four times for Rubicon
models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cause damage to the transfer case.
cluster) alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four-wheel Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are locked there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
together. The light will illuminate when the transfer case
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
is shifted into the 4H position.
NOTE: Do not attempt to shift when only the front or
rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not
equipped with a synchronizer, and the front and rear
driveshaft speeds must be equal for a shift to take place.
Shifting while the front or rear wheels are spinning at
different speeds can cause damage to the transfer case.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
4H Position
WARNING! (Continued)
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear drive
shaft from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
Shift Positions
This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range (4H) provides additional traction for
loose, slippery road surfaces and should not be used on
dry pavement.
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument
cluster) will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted
into the 4H position.
N (Neutral) Position
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
4WD system mode position, see the information below: This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing behind
2H Position
another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “StartThis range is used for normal street and highway driving ing And Operating” for further information.
on hard-surfaced roads.
4L Position
This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
speed. This range (4L) provides additional traction and Shifting Procedure
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
2H to 4H or 4H to 2H
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion,
CAUTION!
the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you
Exceeding 25 mph (40 km/h) while the transfer case is momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completengaged in 4L may result in an engine overspeed ing the shift. Apply a constant force when shifting the
condition and engine damage.
transfer case lever.
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument 4H to 4L or 4L to 4H
cluster) will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
into the 4L position.
an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press
NOTE: When in 4L, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will the clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the
vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the
display in the instrument cluster.
transfer case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not
pause with the transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift
is completed, place the automatic transmission into
DRIVE or release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred
method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h).
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not
drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
TRAC-LOK REAR AXLE — IF EQUIPPED
The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force
to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the
loss of traction at one driving wheel. If traction differs
between the two rear wheels, the differential automatically proportions the usable torque by providing more
torque to the wheel that has traction.
Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving
conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a
slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
WARNING!
Onvehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential,
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose
control of your vehicle.
5
AXLE LOCK (TRU–LOK) — RUBICON MODELS
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument
panel (to the left of the steering column).
Axle Lock Switch
This feature will only activate when the following conditions are met:
• Key in ignition, vehicle in 4L (Low) range.
• Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
To activate the system, push the bottom of the AXLE
LOCK switch once to lock the rear axle only (the “Rear
Axle Lock Indicator Light” will illuminate), push the
bottom of the switch again to lock the front axle (the
“Front Axle Lock Indicator Light” will illuminate). When
the rear axle is locked, pushing the bottom of switch
again will lock or unlock the front axle.
ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater
front suspension travel in off-road situations.
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch
located on the instrument panel (to the left of the steering
NOTE: The indicator lights will flash until the axles are column).
fully locked or unlocked.
To unlock the axles, push the top of the AXLE LOCK
switch.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L
(Low) range, or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
sway bar should remain in on-road mode during normal
driving conditions.
WARNING!
Sway Bar Switch
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system. Push
the switch again to deactivate the system. The “Sway Bar
Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) will
illuminate when the bar is disconnected. The “Sway Bar
Indicator Light” will flash during activation transition, or
when activation conditions are not met. The stabilizer/
Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on
hard-surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph
(29 km/h); you may lose control of the vehicle, which
could result in serious injury. The front stabilizer bar
enhances vehicle stability and is necessary for maintaining control of the vehicle. The system monitors
vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the
stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is
indicated by a flashing or solid “Sway Bar Indicator
Light.” Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph
(22 km/h), the system will once again attempt to
return to off-road mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4H
or 4L and push the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the
off-road position. Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information. The
“Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash until the stabilizer/
sway bar has been fully disconnected.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to on-road
mode, the “Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash in
the instrument cluster and vehicle stability is greatly
reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over
18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster than 18 mph
(29 km/h) may cause loss of control of the vehicle,
which could result in serious injury. Contact your
local authorized dealer for assistance.
NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked
due to left and right suspension height differences. This
condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle
loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to
disconnect/reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar
must be aligned. This alignment may require that the ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
to side.
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR switch
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
again.
ordinary vehicles.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
5
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Side Step Removal — If Equipped
Bodyside Nut
NOTE: Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be 2. Remove one bolt from the underside of the vehicle.
removed to prevent damage if so equipped.
1. Remove the two nuts from the bodyside.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
conditions: hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,
mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on
your vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road
driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel
and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden
accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases, there are no
road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore,
you will need to use your own good judgment on what is
safe and what is not. When on a trail, you should always
be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while
remembering what you are currently driving over.
Underside Bolt
3. Remove the side step assembly.
CAUTION!
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving offroad. You should be familiar with the terrain and area
before proceeding. There are many types of surface
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
exhaust system could cause a fire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an
off-road situation.
Do not use 4L (Low) range when operating the
vehicle on dry pavement. Driveline hardware damage can result.
When To Use 4L (Low) Range
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation
When off-road driving, shift into 4L (Low) for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase low
speed pulling power. This range should be limited to
extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines, or sand where additional low speed pulling power
is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h)
should be avoided when in 4L (Low) range.
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous use of the brake and throttle (two-footed driving).
When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects,
using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the
vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also
used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a
steep incline.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
Mud
Snow
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires
and is very difficult to get through. You should use
second gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (automatic
transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L (Low)
position to maintain your momentum. If you start to slow
to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a
1/4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction.
Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage
and getting stuck. They are normally full of debris from
previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before
entering any mud hole, get out and determine how deep
it is, if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle
can be safely recovered if stuck.
In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at
slower speeds, shift the transmission into a low gear and
the transfer case into 4L (Low) if necessary. Do not shift to
a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Overrevving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will
be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your
steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and
forth, while still applying throttle. This will allow the
tires to get a fresh ⬙bite⬙ and help maintain your momentum.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
Sand
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire
pressure. When crossing soft, sandy spots in a trail,
maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do not stop. The
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire
pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle’s momentum. If you are
going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes,
reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103
kPa) to allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced tire
pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand, but you must return
the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to
reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce
your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
Points)
While driving off-road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different
types of obstacles. Before proceeding, review the path
ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability
to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.
Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the
vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle
forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the
throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and
ease the vehicle up and over the object.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to loose control of
your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
Using A Spotter
CAUTION!
There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle
or determine the correct path. Determining the correct • Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large
enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.
path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting
•
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you
enough to contact the door sills.
over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut
the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large
guide you through.
rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your
Crossing Large Rocks
vehicle’s mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45When approaching large rocks, choose a path which degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle
ensures you drive over the largest of them with your independently. You need to use caution when crossing
tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross
The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great
wall and is designed to take the abuse. Always look enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get
ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed
your tires.
dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
You should now be able to drive out following the trench
you just created at a 45-degree angle.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high-centered.
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing
an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be
on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the
log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and
accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your
tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
Getting High-Centered
If you get hung up or high-centered on an object, get out
of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is
hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and
what is the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up
and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off
of the high point when you let the vehicle down. You can
also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off
the object.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good understanding of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep
to climb and should not be attempted. You should always
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You
should always climb hills straight up and down. Never
attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
Before Climbing A Steep Hill
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or steepness.
Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction
is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down?
What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,
branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything looks good and you feel confident, shift the transmission into a lower gear with 4L (Low) engaged, and
proceed with caution, maintaining your momentum as
you climb the hill.
Driving Up Hill
Once you have determined your ability to proceed and
have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle
up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an
easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start
up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade; the
abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control. If
the front end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle
slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground. As you
approach the crest of the hill, ease off the throttle and
slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip as
you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no
more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth. This will
provide a fresh ⬙bite⬙ into the surface and will usually
provide enough traction to complete the climb. If you do
not make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and
back straight down the grade using engine resistance
along with the vehicle brakes.
controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight
descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill
to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If you feel
confident in your ability to proceed, then make sure you
are in 4L (Low) and proceed with caution. Allow engine
braking to control the descent and apply your brakes, if
necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline
increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in
severe injury.
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured or killed.
Driving Downhill
Driving Across An Incline
Before driving down a steep hill, you need to determine If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If it is
if it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface necessary, know your vehicle’s abilities. Driving across
traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow, an incline places more weight on the downhill wheels,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
which increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or
rollover. Make sure the surface has good traction with
firm and stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline at
an angle heading slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a
rollover, which may result in severe injury.
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift
into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing
engine braking to control the descent and apply your
brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle, which may result in
severe injury. Always back carefully straight down a
hill in REVERSE. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes. Never drive
diagonally across a hill, always drive straight up or
down.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided, if possible, and only
be attempted when necessary in a safe, responsible
manner. You should only drive through areas which are
designated and approved. You should tread lightly and
avoid damage to the environment. You should know
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
your vehicle’s abilities and be able to recover it if
CAUTION!
something goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a
vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested • Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transwater into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do
fer case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you
not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested
drive too fast or through too deep of water. Water
water first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. Shift
can cause permanent damage to engine, driveline
into first gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (autoor other vehicle components, and your brakes will
matic transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L
be less effective once wet and/or muddy.
(Low) position and proceed very slowly with a constant • This vehicle is capable of crossing through water at
slow speed {3 to 5 mph (5 to 8 km/h) maximum} and
a depth of 30 inches (76 cm) at speeds no greater
light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to
than 5 mph (8 km/h). Water ingestion can occur
accelerate through the crossing. After crossing any water
causing damage to your vehicle.
higher than the bottom of the axle differentials, you
should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water Before You Cross Any Type Of Water
ingestion.
As you approach any type of water, you need to determine
if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get
out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick.
You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current
and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
waters; check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not
CAUTION!
be intruding on any wildlife, and you can recover the
vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the water Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effecdepth, current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms, the tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing the water level on
the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when determining the Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or
Other Flowing Water
depth and the ability to safely cross.
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other
Standing Water
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas
normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water
types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it
difficult to determine an accurate water depth, approach
angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes
are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to
entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle
recovery. If you are able to determine you can safely cross,
than proceed using the low and slow method.
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in
shallow water. Fast moving water can easily push your
vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of control. Even in
very shallow water, a high current can still wash the dirt
out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle
in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of personal injury
and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths
greater than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. You
should never attempt to cross flowing water which is
deeper than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. Even
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle downstream and out of control if the water is deep enough to
push on the large surface area of the vehicle’s body.
Before you proceed, determine the speed of the current,
the water’s depth, approach angle, bottom condition and
if there are any obstacles. Then cross at an angle heading
slightly upstream using the low and slow technique.
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
WARNING!
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can
push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of
control. This could put you and your passengers at
risk of injury or drowning.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
propeller shafts.
After Driving Off-Road
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
there is a problem with the power steering system.
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will • Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
correct the situation.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici- If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho- level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
rized dealer.
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission
in REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
Parking Brake Lever
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector/shift lever in PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector/shift
lever out of PARK. The parking brake should always be
applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position on an automatic
transmission as a substitute for the parking brake.
Always apply the parking brake fully when parked
to guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector/shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still function. There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident by increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake Warning
Light.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC).
position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased • Brake pedal pulsations.
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking. These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
WARNING! (Continued)
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
System Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifi- repaired as soon as possible.
cation may result in degraded ABS performance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake Assist System (BAS)
WARNING!
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens- natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, inreduce braking distances. The BAS complements the cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroquickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak- must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure the safety of others.
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
roll down the hill as normal.
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
a manual transmission if the clutch is pressed HSA will
remain active.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing With HSA
WARNING! (Continued)
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to 7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instruadditional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.
ment Panel” for further information.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
back to the ON position. If the sequence was comfollowing steps:
pleted properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
Traction Control System (TCS)
3. Apply the parking brake.
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
4. Start the engine.
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
turn to the left.
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differenbank below the climate control four times within tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
turn on and turn off two times.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (loThis system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
cated in the instrument cluster), starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle
control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
The ESC system has three available operating modes in
4H range. The system has one operating mode in 4L
range. Two-wheel drive vehicles and four-wheel drive
vehicles in 2H range have two operating modes.
4H Range (4WD Models)
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4H range.
ESC Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the ESC
OFF switch. When in ⬙ESC Partial Off⬙ mode, the TCS
portion of ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the
⬙ESC Off Indicator Light⬙ will be illuminated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep
snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin
than ESC would normally allow is required to gain
traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the
ESC OFF switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On”
mode of operation.
WARNING!
• When in ⴖESC Partial Offⴖ mode, the TCS functionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section), has been disabled
and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in ⴖESC Partial Offⴖ mode, the engine
power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and
the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the ⴖESC Partial Offⴖ mode.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the ⬙ESC Partial
Off⬙ mode by pushing the ESC OFF switch. Once the
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the ⬙ESC Partial
Off⬙ mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the ESC OFF switch. This may be done ESC Full Off
while the vehicle is in motion.
This mode is entered by pushing and holding momentarily pushing the ESC OFF switch for five seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
In the ⬙ESC Full Off⬙ mode, the engine torque reduction
and stability features are disabled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In
an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Full Off”
mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
When in ⬙ESC Full Off⬙ mode, ESC and TCS, except for
the Brake Limited Differential (BLD) feature described in
the TCS section, are turned off until the vehicle reaches
an approximate speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). For speeds
at or exceeding approximately 40 mph (64 km/h) the ESC
goes into ⬙ESC Partial Off⬙. When the vehicle speed drops
below 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC system goes back to
⬙ESC Full Off⬙. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC OFF switch. This will restore normal “ESC On”
mode of operation. The ⬙ESC Off Indicator Light” will
always be illuminated when ESC is in ⬙ESC Partial Off⬙
and ⬙ESC full Off⬙.
WARNING!
With the ESC in ⴖESC Full Offⴖ mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features offered by
ESC and ERM are disabled. In an emergency evasive
ESC OFF Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
maneuver, the ESC and ERM systems will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. The ⴖESC Full Offⴖ
mode is intended for off-road use only.
4L Range (4WD Models)
ESC Full Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4L range.
Whenever the vehicle is started in 4L range, or the
transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4H range or
NEUTRAL to 4L range, the ESC system will be in this
mode. In 4L range, ESC and TCS, except for the Brake
Limited Differential (BLD) feature described in the TCS
section, are turned off until the vehicle reaches an approximate speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). For speeds at or
exceeding approximately 40 mph (64 km/h) the ESC goes
into ⬙ESC Partial Off⬙ When the vehicle speed drops
below 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC system goes back to
⬙ESC Full Off⬙. The ESC is in ⬙ESC Full Off⬙ at low vehicle
speeds in 4L range so that it will not interfere with
off-road driving, but the ESC function returns to provide
the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h).
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will always be illuminated in 4L range when ESC is in ⬙ESC Full Off⬙ or ⬙ESC
Partial Off⬙.
NOTE: The “ESC OFF” message will display and an
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in
the PARK position from any position other than PARK,
and then moved out of the PARK position. This will
occur even if the message was previously cleared.
WARNING!
With the ESC in ⴖESC Full Offⴖ mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features offered by
ESC and ERM are disabled. In an emergency evasive
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
WARNING! (Continued)
maneuver, the ESC and ERM systems will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. The ⴖESC Full Offⴖ
mode is intended for off-road use only.
than ESC would normally allow is required to gain
traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the
ESC OFF switch. This will restore the normal ⬙ESC On⬙
mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the ⬙ESC Partial
ESC On
Off⬙ mode by pushing the ⬙ESC Full Off⬙ switch. Once the
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 2H range situation requiring ESC to be switched to the ⬙ESC Partial
and on 2WD vehicles.
Off⬙ mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the ⬙ESC Full Off⬙ switch. This may be
ESC Partial Off
done while the vehicle is in motion.
When in ⬙ESC Partial Off⬙ mode, the TCS portion of ESC
The ESC will restore to normal ESC On mode after each
(except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS
key on.
section), has been disabled and the ⬙ESC Off Indicator
Light⬙ will be illuminated.
2H Range (4WD Models) Or 2WD Models
This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep
snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode.
position. It should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acESC OFF Indicator Light
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
NOTE:
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen- monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
that caused the ESC activation.
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
or other vehicles.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer
is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in this section for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer
from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph
HDC is only intended for low speed off-road driving. (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attemptHDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills in ing to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will
flash on/off.
off-road driving conditions by applying the brakes when
necessary.
When enabled, HDC senses the terrain and activates
The symbol indicates the status of the Hill when the vehicle is descending a hill. HDC speed may be
adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions. The
Descent Control (HDC) feature. The lamp will
be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only speed corresponds to the transmission gear selected.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
be armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD
Gear
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
DRIVE
REVERSE
Approximate HDC Set Speed
1 mph (1.5 km/h)
2.5 mph (4 km/h)
4 mph (6.5 km/h)
5.5 mph (9 km/h)
7.5 mph (12 km/h)
1 mph (1.5 km/h)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
However, the driver can override HDC operation by NOTE:
applying the brake to slow the vehicle down below the
• If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW range, the
HDC control speed. If more speed is desired during HDC
“Hill Descent Control Indicator Light” will flash for
control, the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed
five seconds and HDC will not be enabled.
in the usual manner. When either the brake or the
• If the ESC senses that the brakes are overheating the
accelerator is released, HDC will control the vehicle at the
“Hill Descent Control Indicator Light” will flash for
original set speed.
five seconds and HDC will become deactivated until
Enabling HDC
the brakes have cooled.
1. Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW range. Refer to Disabling HDC
“Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and OperPush the “Hill Descent” button or shift the transfer case
ating” for further information.
out of 4WD LOW range. The “Hill Descent Control
2. Push the “Hill Descent” button. The “Hill Descent Indicator” light in the instrument cluster will turn off.
Control Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will
turn on solid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
5
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
is 650 lbs (294 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
650 lbs [294 kg]).
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
the weight referenced here.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
capacity calculated in step 4.
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or NOTE:
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and paswith varying seating configurations and number and
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
carry capacity of your vehicle.
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will • For the following example, the combined weight of
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
(392 kg).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Economy
(Continued)
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Economy
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
NOTE:
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Tire Inflation Pressures
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
vehicle to drift left or right.
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
may look properly inflated even when they are under- of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
inflated.
At least once a month:
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original combine them with other types of tires.
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatTire Repair
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
additional information.
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
Tire Types
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informaAll Season Tires — If Equipped
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
Snow Tires
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
If you need snow tires, select tires checked before using these tire types.
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Spare Tires — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with
a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
replaced.
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
• Driving style.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire with oil, grease, and gasoline.
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread Replacement Tires
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
• Distance driven.
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manuhigher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivatread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main- lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
• P225/75R16 or a P235/65R17 tire with the use of a
traction device that meets the SAE type “Class S”
specification is recommended.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
CAUTION! (Continued)
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage to the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule
should be followed to balance tire wear.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
Tire Rotation
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference
on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7.0 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
also increase as the vehicle is driven; this is normal and NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres- need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
sure.
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning The system will automatically update and the “Tire
threshold for any reason, including low temperature Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once
the updated tire pressures have been received. The
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the “Tire Pressure Monitor- cold (parked for more than three hours) air pressure of 35
ing Telltale Light” has been illuminated, the tire pressure psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
must be increased to the recommended cold placard and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a
pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire
Telltale Light” to be turned OFF.
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only
after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, nor to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- the proper pressure.
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not following components:
reached the level to trigger illumination of the “Tire
• Receiver Module
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
the tire.
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
Base TPM System
wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full size
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
tires. A low spare tire will not cause the “Tire Pressure
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate or the chime to The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
sound while stowed in the spare location.
on and off for 75 seconds, and will remain on solid when
a system fault is detected. The system fault will also
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
PRESSURE” message will display in the EVIC, and an
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
audible chime will be activated when one or more of the
when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
four active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur,
can occur by any of the following scenarios:
you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
value. The system will automatically update and the
TPM sensors.
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish
once the updated tire pressures have been received. The 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel NOTE:
housings.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) when swapped
Vehicles not equipped with EVIC will inform the driver
with a low pressure road tire. In the event that the
which tire(s) are low but not provide actual tire pressure.
matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
The low tire ISO telltale will illuminate along with
pressure road tire, the next ignition key cycle will still
“LoTIrE” message displayed in the ODO and then it will
show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to
scroll to which tire location is lower than the Placard Value.
be ON, and a chime to sound. Driving the vehicle for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn
Tire location will be displayed as follows:
OFF the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” as
LF = Left Front
long as none of the road tires are below the low
pressure warning threshold.
rF = right Front
Lr = Left rear
rr = right rear
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound
and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn ON. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. For each subsequent ignition
key cycle, a chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. Once you repair or
replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the
vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update
automatically and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an auThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
dible chime will be activated, when one or more of the
following components:
four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
• Receiver Module
EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE” message for a minimum of five seconds. An “Inflate to XX” message and a
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the low
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
tire(s) “flashing” will also be displayed. Refer to “Elecwhich display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “UnderCenter (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
wheel, if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full-size
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
tires.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
the pressure value(s) will stop “flashing,” and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once
the updated tire pressure(s) have been received.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is “flashing” on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
inflation value shown in the “Inflate to XX” message. The
system will automatically update, the graphic display of
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Light” will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) when swapped
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
with a low pressure road tire.. In the event that the
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
any of the following:
pressure road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
still show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
to be ON, a chime to sound, a “LOW TIRE” message to
TPM sensors.
appear in the EVIC, and the graphic display will still
show the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and the low tire
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
pressure value “flashing.” Driving the vehicle for up to
that affects radio wave signals.
10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn OFF the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” as long as
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
none of road tires are below the low pressure warning
housings.
threshold.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain ON, a chime
will sound, and the EVIC will still display the ⬙Inflate
to XX⬙ message and a “flashing” pressure value in the
graphic display. After driving the vehicle for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the
EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. For each
subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound,
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid,
and the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and 3.6L Engine
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide optimum
fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded “Regular” gasoline having a posted octane number of 87
as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher
octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not
provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these
engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxyPoor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard genates such as ethanol.
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considCAUTION!
ering service for the vehicle.
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoReformulated Gasoline
line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner these blends may result in starting and drivability
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. problems, damage critical fuel system components,
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe- cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im- and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
prove air quality.
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop- than 15% ethanol (E-15).
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
Materials Added To Fuel
Fuel System Cautions
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
WARNING! (Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap
5
The fuel filler cap is located on the driver’s side of the
vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost or damaged, be sure
the replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Cap
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping
from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• Tighten the fuel filler cap about 1/4 turn until you hear
one click. This is an indication that the cap is properly
tightened.
• If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL
will come on. Be sure the cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
VEHICLE LOADING
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a
malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Push the odometer reset button to
turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message
will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected
twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL off.
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so Tire Size
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
Payload
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the Rim Size
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
listed.
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front Inflation Pressure
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the Curb Weight
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in- of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi- capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
cle’s GVWR.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
added.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
Loading
the brakes operate.
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
CAUTION!
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
In this section you will find safety tips and information
further information.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
and safely as possible.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temTo maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
follow the requirements and recommendations in this ready for operation⬙ condition.
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
Common Towing Definitions
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
TRAILER TOWING
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. and trailer when weighed in combination.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
is 10% to 15% of the vehicle’s GTW for a conventional
hitch. You must consider this as part of the load on your
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
vehicle.
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or Frontal Area
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle CertificaThe frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
information.
Trailer Sway Control – If Equipped
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer
tongue. It typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
trailers.
WARNING!
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/
Transmission
Axle
Model
3.6L/Manual
3.21
3.6L/Manual
3.73
3.6L/
Automatic
3.21
3.6L/
Automatic
3.73
Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
GCWR
(Gross Combined Wt.
Rating)
6,900 lbs
(3 130 kg)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
8,400 lbs
(3 810 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
6,900 lbs
(3 130 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
8,400 lbs
(3 810 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
Engine/
Transmission
Axle
Model
3.6L/Manual
3.21
Two–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
Two–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
Two–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
3.6L/Manual
3.73
3.6L/
Automatic
3.21
GCWR
(Gross Combined Wt.
Rating)
7,000 lbs
(3 175 kg)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
5
8,500 lbs
(3 856 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
7,000 lbs
(3 175 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine/
Transmission
Axle
Model
3.6L/
Automatic
3.73
3.6L/Manual
4.10
3.6L/
Automatic
3.73
Two–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
Two–Door
Rubicon
Model
(4WD)
Two–Door
Rubicon
Model
(4WD)
GCWR
(Gross Combined Wt.
Rating)
8,500 lbs
(3 856 kg)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
8,600 lbs
(3 900 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
8,600 lbs
(3 900 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
Engine/
Transmission
3.6L/
Automatic
Axle
Model
4.10
Two–Door
Rubicon
Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
3.6L/Manual
3.21
3.6L/Manual
3.73
3.6L/
Automatic
3.21
GCWR
(Gross Combined Wt.
Rating)
8,600 lbs
(3 900 kg)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
5
7,400 lbs
(3 357 kg)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
8,900 lbs
(4 037 kg)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
7,400 lbs
(3 357 kg)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
552 STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine/
Transmission
Axle
Model
3.6L/
Automatic
3.73
3.6L/Manual
3.21
3.6L/Manual
3.73
Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
GCWR
(Gross Combined Wt.
Rating)
8,900 lbs
(4 037 kg)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
7,500 lbs
(3 402 kg)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
9,000 lbs
(4 082 kg)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 553
Engine/
Transmission
3.6L/
Automatic
Axle
Model
3.21
Four–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Rubicon
Model
(4WD)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.73
3.6L/Manual
4.10
GCWR
(Gross Combined Wt.
Rating)
7,500 lbs
(3 402 kg)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
5
9,000 lbs
(4 082 kg)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
9,200 lbs
(4 173 kg)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
554 STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine/
Transmission
Axle
3.6L/
Automatic
3.73
3.6L/
Automatic
4.10
Model
GCWR
(Gross Combined Wt.
Rating)
9,200 lbs
(4 173 kg)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Four–Door
32 sq ft
3,500 lbs
Rubicon
(2.97 sq m)
(1 587 kg)
Model
(4WD)
9,200 lbs
32 sq ft
3,500 lbs
Four–Door
Rubicon
(4 173 kg)
(2.97 sq m)
(1 587 kg)
Model
(4WD)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING 555
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (ie.
the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the
weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information
placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side Consider the following items when computing the
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of • The tongue weight of the trailer.
many trailer collisions.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
put in or on your vehicle.
your bumper or trailer hitch.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
556 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended:
NOTE: Trailer towing requires special rear axle lubricant.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the correct fluid type.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 557
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to the brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. With a manual transmission, shift the transmission into first gear. And
with four-wheel-drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
(Continued)
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
558 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operpersonal injury.
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres- • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
sures before trailer usage.
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
brake controller is not required.
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
inspection procedure.
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor2,000 lbs (907 kg).
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 559
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Donot connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
5
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
560 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Trailer Tow Package will include a four–pin wiring
harness. Use a factory-approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustration.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
STARTING AND OPERATING 561
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve perforBefore setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
mance and extend transmission life by reducing excesand backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
traffic.
provide better engine braking.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the transslippage.
mission fluid and filter as specified for police, taxi, fleet,
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
or frequent trailer towing. “Refer to the “Maintenance
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent before towing.
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the
AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear.
Towing Tips
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
562 STARTING AND OPERATING
AutoStick — If Equipped
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and Cooling System
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if To reduce potential for engine and transmission overthe desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or heating, take the following actions:
“2” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
City Driving
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces- When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transsary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road Highway Driving
conditions allow.
Reduce speed.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
Air Conditioning
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
Turn off temporarily.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 563
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
•
•
•
•
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Front
Rear
ALL
Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
Automatic transmission in PARK
Manual transmission in gear
(NOT in NEUTRAL [N])
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOTE: When recreational towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state
and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
564 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models
CAUTION! (Continued)
NOTE: The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL
(N), automatic transmission must be shifted into PARK,
and manual transmission must be placed in gear (NOT in
NEUTRAL) for recreational towing.
• Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not
in Neutral) for recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK
for recreational towing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 565
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
CAUTION!
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear drive
shaft from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or
depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
4. Turn the engine OFF.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N).
6. Start the engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
566 STARTING AND OPERATING
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
CAUTION!
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual
transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there is
no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in
DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.
10. Turn the engine OFF.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual 14. Release the parking brake.
transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 567
8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or place
manual transmission in NEUTRAL.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
9. Release the brake pedal.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL (N)
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con- 10.
nected to the tow vehicle.
11.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
13.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
14.
do not start the engine.
5. Press and hold the brake pedal.
Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
Start the engine.
Press and hold the brake pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions),
and check that the vehicle operates normally.
6. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position.
NOTE: When shifting the transfer case out of NEUTRAL
(N), the engine should remain OFF to avoid gear clash.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .570
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .570 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .581
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .573
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
▫ Jump Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
䡵 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . .586
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .589
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
▫ Four–Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmission into
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
CAUTION!
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
from the engine cooling system.
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m)
1/2” x 20
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
19 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
6
WARNING!
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Storage
Jack Location
NOTE: Turn the black plastic wing nut counterclockwise
The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear storage to loosen the jack from the storage bin.
compartment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575
NOTE: If you have added aftermarket accessories to the
spare tire mounted carrier, it cannot exceed a gross
weight of 85 lbs (38.5 kg) including the weight of the
spare tire.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Plastic Wing Nut Location
Spare Tire Removal
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
To remove the spare tire from the carrier, remove the tire
cover, if equipped, and remove the lug nuts with the lug 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
wrench turning them counterclockwise.
3. Set the parking brake.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or a Jacking Instructions
manual transmission into REVERSE.
WARNING!
5. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from the stored
location.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the jack
handle driver to the extension, then to the lug wrench.
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the
vehicle. Place the jack under the axle tube, as shown.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
fully engaged.
Front Jacking Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise.
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the
surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the
spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left, Road Tire Installation
and remove the jack.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alterend of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
nate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice.
lug nuts.
Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
correct lug nut torque.
WARNING!
10. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks.
11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their proper locations.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581
each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
nut torque refer to “Torque Specifications” in this follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have precautions.
them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
CAUTION!
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jump-Start
WARNING!
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of
the engine compartment, behind the Power Distribution
Center.
Positive Battery Post
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and
turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
and the fuel injection system.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the disWARNING!
charged battery.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
serious injury. Only use the specific ground point, do 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
not use any other exposed metal parts.
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
discharged battery.
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear
you should have the battery and charging system in- and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently
spected at your authorized dealer.
pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing the
CAUTION!
engine.
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
CAUTION!
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the endegrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
starting.
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
the risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are
mounted in the front and the rear.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle. Always use an appropriately rated
tow strap.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle. Tow straps are recommended
when towing the vehicle, chains may cause vehicle
damage.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
gear selector override access cover (located to the right
of the gear selector).
4. Turn the ignition to the ACC or ON/RUN position,
but do not start the engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Push and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
6. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access
port, and push and hold the override release lever
down.
7. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
9. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.
Gear Selector Override Access Cover
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589
may also be towed as described under “Recreational
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
4WD MODELS
See instructions under “Recreational Towing”
• Automatic Transmission in PARK
• Manual Transmission in gear ( NOT in Neutral)
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) Without The Ignition Key
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
position, not the ACC position.
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only apIf the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Gear proved method of towing without the ignition key is
Selector Override” in this section for instructions on with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necesshifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
towing.
Four–Wheel Drive Models
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 591
If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward
direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the
transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is
in PARK (for automatic transmissions) or in gear ( NOT
in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions). Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for detailed instructions.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
6
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .595
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .596
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . .607
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .596
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .599
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .632
▫ Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System
(Manual Transmission) — If Equipped. . . . . . .635
▫ Front Park/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .636
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
▫ Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . .648 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
GENUINE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
— Battery
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick (Under Engine Cover)
— Engine Oil Fill
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
9 — Air Cleaner Filter
10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
11 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A “gASCAP” message will be
displayed in the odometer. Tighten the gas cap until a
⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset
button to turn the message off. If the problem persists,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacestarted. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the prob- ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
lem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
PROGRAMS
following:
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction start this test over.
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
system is ready for testing.
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
happen:
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off REPLACEMENT PARTS
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ento the I/M station.
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, Limited Warranty.
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
DEALER SERVICE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding 1 quart (0.95 liters) of oil when the
reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a
reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informaengine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
tion.
engine oil level should be checked five minutes after a
warmed up engine has been shut off.
Checking Oil Level
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter- American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or Identification Symbol
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
This symbol means that the oil has
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
been certified by the American
concern for fleet customers.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
Engine Oil Selection
manufacturer only recommends
For best performance and maximum protection under all
API Certified engine oils.
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and
10W-30 engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
Synthetic Engine Oils
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on number should not be used.
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine ComMaterials Added To Engine Oil
partment” illustration in this section.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the adNOTE: MOPAR SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil performance may be impaired by supplemental addimeeting MS-6395 is not available.
tives.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi- Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade numCare should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
ber should not be used.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Maintenance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance
intervals.
WARNING!
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Gasoline Engine
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as
shown in the Maintenance Schedule.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1. Remove the bolts from the air cleaner intake tube.
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Spring Clips
— Air Hose
— Clean Air Hose Clamp
— Clean Air Intake Tube Bolts
— Air Cleaner Filter Cover
— Clean Air Intake Tube
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
2. Remove air hose and loosen clean air hose clamp then 3. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.
release the spring clips on the air intake cover.
7
Air Cleaner Air Hose
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Spring Clips
2 — Air Hose
3 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Filter Cleaner Cover
— Air Hose
— Clean Air Intake Tube
— Clean Air Hose Clamp
— Air Cleaner Filter
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
assembly.
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface
facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly
locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to
the housing assembly and install air hose.
Air Cleaner Filter
4. Tighten air intake clamp and tighten air cleaner intake
tube bolts.
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition switch position. You could be injured by
the moving fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct
position on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle ser• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt viced at an authorized dealer.
body)
Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING! (Continued)
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
7
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
— If Equipped
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a
low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air
Filter)
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. With the A/C air filter removed and
the blower operating, the blower can contact hands
and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes,
resulting in personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
Glove Compartment
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to re1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
place the filter:
2 — Glove Compartment
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and 3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
lower the door.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the two
air filter access doors to the HVAC housing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
6. Remove the two particulate air filters from the HVAC
air inlet housing. Pull the filter elements straight out of
the housing, one at a time.
7
Air Filter Retaining Tabs
1 — Left Retaining Tab
2 — Right Retaining Tab
Air Filter Access Door Open
5. Open the two air filter access doors.
1 — Air Conditioning Filter Access Door
2 — Air Conditioning Air Filter
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
7. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position Body Lubrication
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal. Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
CAUTION!
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
to properly install the filter will result in the need to operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
replace it more often.
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
8. Close A/C Air Filter access doors and secure retaining lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
tabs.
components to ensure proper function. When performing
9. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechaRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
maintenance intervals.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
are experienced. This inspection should include the folwindshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
lowing points:
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
• Wear Or Uneven Edges
Windshield Wiper Blades
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods • Foreign Material
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt • Hardening Or Cracking
from a dry windshield.
• Deformation Or Fatigue
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against
the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
press the release tab on the wiper blade and while
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper 3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
blade from the wiper arm.
7
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm
is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm, latch engagement will be accompanied by an
audible click.
Rear Wiper Assembly
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Blade
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Remove the rear wiper arm pivot cap To access the
wiper arm nut.
2. Remove the wiper arm nut and gently rock the wiper
arm while pulling towards you to remove wiper arm
from the stud.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp
the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm with your right
hand. With your left hand hold the wiper arm as you
pull the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past its
stop far enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin
from the receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
7
Wiper Arm With Pivot Cap Removed
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm Nut
3 — Wiper Arm
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
4. Still grasping the wiper blade, move the wiper blade
away from the wiper arm to disengage.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm Receptacle
Wiper Arm
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and
wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help blade perfor1. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
mance.
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the
wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
2. Install wiper assembly back on the wiper stud at it’s rating information can be found on most washer fluid
original position and gently tighten nut.
containers.
3. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
WARNING!
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
Installing The Rear Wiper
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer (if equipped) is shared. The fluid
reservoir is located in the engine compartment. Be sure to
check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be
exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust System
WARNING!
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
Cooling System
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser (if
WARNING!
equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard NOTE:
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
operated.
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentralocal authorized dealer.
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recomdealer for assistance.
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionHOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
possible.
engine cooling system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System Pressure Cap
WARNING! (Continued)
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
WARNING!
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding spills immediately.
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
Engine Coolant Level
Points To Remember
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling, and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the
bottle.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing en- evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
a month.
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antiWhen additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezcoolant bottle. Do not overfill.
ing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
Power Disc Brakes
WARNING!
Disc brakes do not require adjustment; however, several
hard stops during the break-in period are recommended
to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level to the full level mark on the side of the
reservoir of the brake master cylinder. With disc brakes,
fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
If the brake fluid level is abnormally low, check system
for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
Special Additives
Fluid Level Check
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is
any special additives in the transmission.
at normal operating temperature (approximately 180°F/
82°C). This occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
driving. At normal operating temperature, the fluid
product and its performance may be impaired by supplecannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this Use the following procedure to check the transmission
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid fluid level properly:
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
adversely affect seals.
2. Remove the engine cover by pulling it up off the
mounting studs (two in the front and two in the rear).
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
3. Run the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear position (allowing time for the transmission to fully engage in each position), ending with the transmission in
PARK.
through the dipstick tube, wait a minimum of two
minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission
before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE:
6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
• The holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the
actual level is at or above the hole.
7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if
there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the
dipstick. Note that the holes in the dipstick will be
full of fluid if the actual level is at or above the hole.
The fluid level should be between the HOT (upper)
reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating
temperature. If the fluid level is low, add fluid
through the dipstick tube to bring it to the proper
level. Do not overfill. Use ONLY the specified fluid
(refer to ⬙Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts⬙ for
fluid specifications). After adding any quantity of oil
• If it is necessary to check the transmission below the
operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two COLD (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 80°F (27°C). If the
fluid level is correctly established at 80° F (27°C), it
should be between the HOT (upper) reference holes
when the transmission reaches 180° F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the normal
operating temperature.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
Fluid And Filter Changes
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it may
not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until
the temperature is elevated enough to produce an
accurate reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to
warm the fluid.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual Transmission)
8. Reinstall the engine cover and snap it down securely
— If Equipped
onto the four mounting studs.
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
9. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Flusure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is ids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from Your Vehicle” for further information.
its fully seated position, as long as its seal remains
engaged in the dipstick tube.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
Use only manufacturer’s recommended manual transthe vehicle. If the fluid becomes contaminated with
mission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
water, it should be changed immediately. Otherwise,
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informachange the fluid as recommended in the Maintenance
tion.
Schedule. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
Fluid Level Check
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Lubricant
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 in (4.76 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
Transfer Case
Adding Fluid
Fluid Level Check
Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid
begins to run out of the hole.
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill
Drain
hole (A) when the vehicle is in a level position.
First remove the fill plug (B), then the drain plug (C). The
recommended tightening torque for the drain and fill
plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
CAUTION!
When replacing the plugs, do not overtighten them.
You could damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Transfer Case
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
Selection Of Lubricant
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
Lubricant should be at the bottom edge of the oil fill hole.
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
Adding Fluid
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
specified above.
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
Fluid Level Check
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639
The following maintenance recommendations will enable Washing
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veresistance built into your vehicle.
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
What Causes Corrosion?
clear water.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumupaint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
The most common causes are:
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
• Stone and gravel impact.
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
open.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Special Care
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain
this finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Care
WARNING!
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
clean damp cloth.
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows Seat Belt Maintenance
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a mild
directly on the mirror.
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Glass Surfaces
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
buckles do not work properly.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle’s interior
trim and top, follow these precautions:
• Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top
down, as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior
trim.
• Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top
material, as damage may result.
• Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry
on the paint, leaving a streak.
• After cleaning your vehicle’s fabric top, always make
sure it is completely dry before lowering.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645
• Be especially careful when washing the windows by
following the directions for “Care of Fabric Top Windows.”
Washing – Use MOPAR Car Wash or equivalent, or mild
soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush with soft
bristles. If extra cleaning is required, use MOPAR Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild
foaming cleaner on the entire top, but support the top
from underneath.
Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by
rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water. Remember
to allow the top to dry before lowering it.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure
may force past the weather strips.
• It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the removable
roof panels may damage the seals, causing water to
leak into the vehicle’s interior.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Care Of Fabric Top Windows
plastic windows without scratching. It removes fine
scratches to improve visibility and provides UV protection to help prevent yellowing.
2. When washing, never use hot water or anything
stronger than a mild soap. Never use solvents such as
alcohol or harsh cleaning agents.
CAUTION!
3. Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then wipe
with a soft and slightly moist, clean cloth.
Your vehicle’s fabric top has pliable plastic windows
which can be scratched unless special care is taken by
following these directions:
4. When removing frost, snow or ice, never use a scraper
or de-icing chemicals. Use warm water only if you
must clean the window quickly.
1. Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead, use a 5. Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from off-road
microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with
driving will have a major impact on zipper operation.
cold or warm, clean water, and wipe across the
Even normal on-road driving and vehicle washing
window, not up and down. MOPAR Jeep Soft Glass
will eventually impact window zipper operation. To
Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all
maintain ease of use of the window zippers, each
window zipper should be cleaned and lubricated
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647
regularly. Use MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and FUSES
Lubricant or equivalent to ease zipper operation.
Before applying, make sure the zipper teeth are clear
WARNING!
of sand, mud, and other materials. Clean both sides of
the zipper, not just one side. Rinse both zipper halves • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
with fresh water and allow to dry. Aggressively work
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
the MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
equivalent into the zipper teeth. If a stuck zipper slide
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
is experienced, work the MOPAR Soft Top Zipper
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into the zipper
injury, fire and/or property damage.
slide. Several applications may be required before the
•
Before
replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
zipper comes free.
is off and that all the other services are switched off
6. Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any tape to the
and/or disengaged.
windows. Adhesives are hard to remove and may • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authodamage the windows.
rized dealer.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses and relays. A label that
identifies each component is printed on the inside of the
cover.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Totally Integrated Power Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649
Cavity
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
J15
Cartridge Fuse
–
30 Amp Pink
–
25 Amp Clear
25 Amp Clear
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
–
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
60 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
Mini Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
–
Transfer Case Module
–
Driver Door Node
Passenger Door Node
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump/Stability Control System
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valve/Stability Control System
–
PZEV Sec Motor/Flex Fuel – If Equipped
Headlamp Wash Relay/Manifold Tuning Valve
Sway Bar
Rear Blower Motor/Radiator Fan
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Main
Rear Defroster
Front Blower
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
J17
J18
J19
J20
J21
J22
M1
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
–
–
Mini Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
2 Amp Grey
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Starter Solenoid
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Trans Range
Radiator Fan
Front Wiper LO/HI
Front/Rear Washer
Spare
Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)/Switch Stop
Lamp Feed
Relay Trailer Lighting (Stoplamp)
Frt/Rear Axle Locker Relay
Clock Spring
Power Inverter – If Equipped
Power Outlet #1/Rain Sensor
Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT)
Front Heated Seat
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651
Cavity
M9
M10
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
Mini Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
M11
M12
M13
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
30 Amp Green
20 Amp Yellow
M14
M15
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
M16
M17
M18
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
Description
Rear Heated Seat – If Equipped
Ignition Off Draw – Vehicle Entertainment System, Satellite
Digital Audio Receiver (SDARS), DVD, Hands-Free Module,
RADIO, Antenna, Universal Garage Door Opener, Vanity Lamp
(Ignition Off Draw) Climate Control System, Underhood Lamp
Amplifier
Ignition Off Draw – Cabin Compartment Node, Wireless Control Module, SIREN, Multifunction Control Switch
Trailer Tow (Export Only)
Climate Control System, Rear View Mirror, Cabin Compartment Node, Transfer Case Switch, Multi-Function Control
Switch, Tire Pressure Monitor, Glow Plug Module – Export
Diesel Only
Airbag Module
Left Tail/License/Park Lamp
Right Tail/Park/Run Lamp
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini Fuse
25 Amp Clear
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
Description
Auto Shut Down (ASD #1 and #2)
Cabin Compartment Node Interior Light, Switch Bank
Auto Shut Down (ASD #3)
Right Horn (HI/LOW)
Left Horn (HI/LOW)
Rear Wiper
Fuel Pump, Diesel Lift Pump – Export Only
Power Window Switch, Driver Window Switch
Ignition Switch Feed, Wireless Module
Powertrain Control Module
Powertrain
Wiper Motor Frt, J1962 Diagnostic Feed
Backup Lamps
Airbag Controller, TT EUROPE
Powertrain Controller
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653
Cavity
M34
M35
M36
M37
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
Mini Fuse
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
M38
–
25 Amp Clear
Description
Park Assist, Climate Control System, Headlamp Wash, Compass
Heated Mirrors
Power Outlet
Anti-Lock Brake System, Electronic Stability Control, Stop
Lamp Switch, Fuel Pump Relay
Lock/Unlock Motors
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
days, you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
You may:
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
• Remove Cartridge fuse #J13 in the Power Distribution
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
Center (PDC) labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) and
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
store it in a safe location within the PDC.
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp
Heater Control Lamps (2)
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger, and Rear Wash/Wipe)
Soundbar Dome Lamp
** Bulbs only available from authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Bulb Number
658
194
**
912
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
H13
3157NA
168
PSX24W
3157
L.E.D.
3157
194
Headlamps (2)
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2)
Front Side Marker Lamps (2)
Fog Lamps
Rear Stop/Tail/Turn Lamps (2)
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
Backup Lamps (2)
License Lamp
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your local authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove the lamp from the collar.
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo- 7. Grasp the bulb and turn 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually 9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock position.
accelerate the clearing process.
10. Remove connector from bulb.
Headlamp
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and push the
1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
connector locking tab to the lock position.
2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the
top 1/4 turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side
and working toward the other.
4. Turn both park and turn signal socket assemblies 1/4
turn counterclockwise and remove.
5. Remove the four screws holding the metal retaining
ring.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb 1/4 turn
clockwise.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657
Front Park/Turn Signal
Front Fog Lamp
1. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the 1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the front
top 1/4 turn counterclockwise and remove.
fog lamp.
2. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side
and working toward the other.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the front
fog lamp connector receptacle.
3. Turn the socket assembly 1/4 turn counterclockwise 3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch features and
and remove from housing. Pull the bulb straight from
squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the
the socket to replace.
back of the front fog lamp housing.
Front Side Marker
1. Reach under the front fender flare and locate the front
side marker socket.
2. Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise 1/3 turn
and remove it from the housing. Pull the bulb straight
from the socket to replace.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
the housing and then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Separate the housing from the body by pushing the
lamp inboard while pulling the lamp away from the
1. Remove the two inboard screws attaching the tail light
body.
housing to the body. DO NOT REMOVE THE OUTBOARD SCREWS AT ANY TIME.
3. Rotate the appropriate socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise, then remove it from the housing.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamp
4. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends
upward from the tailgate behind the spare tire. If service
is needed, obtain the LED/Cover Assembly from your
local authorized dealer.
1. Remove the spare tire.
Inboard Screw Location
2. Remove the four screws holding the lens/cover in
place on the spare tire carrier.
3. Disconnect the wire harness from the back of the LED
cover.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
Two Door Models
18.6 Gallons
Four Door Models
22.5 Gallons
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine
6 Quarts
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/
10.5 Quarts
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Metric
70 Liters
85 Liters
5.6 Liters
9.9 Liters
7
660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil,
and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission –
If Equipped
Manual Transmission – If
Equipped
Transfer Case
Axle Differential (Front)
Axle Differential (Rear)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may affect
the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend MOPAR ATF+4
fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR Manual Transmission Lubricant meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-9224.
We recommend you use MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5).
226 RBI (Model 44) – We recommend you use MOPAR Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE
80W-90) (API GL-5) or equivalent. For trailer towing, use MOPAR Synthetic Gear &
Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W-140). Models equipped with Trac-Lok require an additive.
We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703. If DOT 3, SAE J1703
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
664 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be disYour vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
cold ambient temperatures will influence when the scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
“Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluschange oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles ter Descriptions” or “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as ter (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
for further information.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 665
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter- Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
• Check engine oil level
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a • Check windshield washer fluid level
concern for fleet customers.
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
Severe Duty All Models
wear or damage
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
master cylinder, power steering and automatic transmission, and fill as needed
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Duty.
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
666 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
• Inspect all door latches for presence of grease,
reapply if necessary.
Maintenance Chart
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
necessary
Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
Inspect transfer case fluid.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 667
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
X
8
X
X
X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter.
Replace spark plugs **
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter if using your vehicle for any of
the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Change the automatic transmission fluid
and filter.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
32,000
668 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
X
Change the manual transmission fluid if
using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy
loading, taxi, police, delivery service
(commercial service), off-road, desert
operation or more than 50% of your
driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
Change transfer case fluid if using your
vehicle for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 669
X
X
X
X
X
8
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Change front and rear axle fluid if using
your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, offroad or frequent trailer towing.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
32,000
670 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
X
X
WARNING! (Continued)
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .673
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .673 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .677
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .674
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .674
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . . . . . .675
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .678
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
672 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . .679
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 673
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
674 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (877) 426-5337
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 675
In Mexico Contact
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Service Contract
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
676 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARNING!
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 677
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
MOPAR PARTS
WARRANTY INFORMATION
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect
to the Canadian government should contact Transport
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
678 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 679
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
680 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
Temperature Grades
WARNING!
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
682 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 101, 320
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .603
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427, 612
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips. . . . . . . . . . .425, 428
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610, 611
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . .415, 419, 610
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 322
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380, 401
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625, 659
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 683
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .419
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445, 632, 635
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632, 662
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .185
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
Axle Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .27
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480, 630
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318, 480
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654, 656
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104, 654
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341, 349
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315, 609 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
684 INDEX
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 538
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .597
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .90
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .89
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .82
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .78
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359, 368, 385
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 685
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Compass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338, 341, 348
Compass Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341, 349
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340, 350
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .404
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .628
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .625, 659, 660
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 417, 423, 424
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
686 INDEX
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .181
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .323
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .344
Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Emergency, In Case Of
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .597
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .185
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Disarming, Security System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .42
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Dual Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194, 198
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 687
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 538
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534, 659
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600, 659, 660
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601, 659
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434, 435
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 538
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 622
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Fabric Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Fabric Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427, 612
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603, 660
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104, 657, 658
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
688 INDEX
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .660
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 657
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Folding Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Front Axle (Differential). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534, 660
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534, 659
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . .539, 541, 596
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 689
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Gauges
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439, 446
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect)
Hard Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hard Top, Modular . . . . . . . .
Hard Top Removal . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.115
.206
.206
.214
.570
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . .
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.169
.656
.171
.171
.171
.656
.169
.160
.114
.159
.415
.437
.497
.497
.484
. . . . . . . . .546
10
690 INDEX
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 iPod/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 409
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Jack Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573, 576, 578
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 691
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104, 654
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104, 168
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .326
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 101, 320
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Rear Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318, 480
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104, 170, 657, 658
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 657
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169, 656
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Locking Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
692 INDEX
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Modular Hard Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .326, 597 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678 MOPAR Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598, 677
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438, 636 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636, 662 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . .534, 660
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338, 347 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 693
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600, 660
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353, 600
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603, 660
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601, 659
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602, 659
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .6, 678
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Pets, Transporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .506
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
694 INDEX
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476, 477
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .628
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 28, 31
Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384, 413
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Rear Swing Gate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . .565
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . .567
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Remote Control
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls. . . . . . . . . .411
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 695
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Seat Belt
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .57
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .60
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49, 101
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .57
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380, 401
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
696 INDEX
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49, 51, 54
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Fold And Tumble Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Security Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 322
Security System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Setting The Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359, 368, 385
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 697
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104, 170, 657, 658
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Soft Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225, 258
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515, 516, 517, 575
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 434, 435
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476, 477
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Steering Wheel Audio Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .411
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426, 654
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Sunrider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255, 291
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .63
Sway Bar Disconnect, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
698 INDEX
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Swing Gate, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .419
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Tip Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .505, 506
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 509, 515, 679
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509, 515
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573, 578
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505, 506
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499, 509
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515, 516, 517, 575
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 699
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544, 548, 589
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .563
Trac-Lok Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . .548, 555
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Transaxle
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
Four-Wheel-Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445, 632
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 657, 658
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
700 INDEX
Uconnect
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Uconnect 130
Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode . . . . . . . .366
Operating Instructions Radio Mode . . . . . . .358, 367
Uconnect 130 With Satellite Radio
Multimedia Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .379, 399
Operating Instructions CD Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Operating Instructions Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . .367
Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .404
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340, 350
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506, 541
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426, 654
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Voice Command
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 701
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 417, 423, 424
Windshield, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176, 621
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
16JK72-126-AB
16MK74-126-AA
©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Second
Edition
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising